MSA5M1806A – Owner’s Manual – 2018 Subaru BRZ

SEOCONTENT-START

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column. 2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information. 3 Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. 4 Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information. 5 When trouble arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident. 6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information. 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seatbelt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual. TABLE OF CONTENTS Index 2 1-1. Key information Keys . 22 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Keyless access with push button start system. 25 Remote keyless entry system 38 Doors 43 Trunk lid . 46 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats . 53 Rear seats 56 Head restraints. 58 Seatbelts 60 Steering wheel . 67 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror 69 Outside rear view mirrors . 71 1-4. Opening and closing the windows Power windows 74 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap 78 1-6. Security system Engine immobilizer system 82 Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.). 86 Alarm 87 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture . 91 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) . 93 Front passenger occupant detection system 131 Child restraint systems . 141 Installing child restraints . 145 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle 156 Push-button ignition switch . 172 Engine (ignition) switch. 182 Automatic transmission 185 Manual Transmission . 192 Turn signal lever . 195 Parking brake . 197 Horn 198 1 Before driving 2 When driving 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters 199 Indicators and warning lights . 203 Multi-information display (monochrome display) 210 Multi-information display (color display) . 218 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch 233 Fog light switch . 239 Windshield wipers and washer 240 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control 243 Rear view camera. 248 Driving assist systems 257 Hill start assist. 264 Rear wing 269 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage . 272 Vehicle load limits . 276 Winter driving tips . 277 Trailer towing 282 Dinghy towing . 283 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Manual air conditioning system 286 Automatic air conditioning system 293 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . 302 3-2. Using the audio system AUX port/USB port . 304 Using the microphone 305 3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights list . 306 • Interior light 307 3-4. Using the storage features List of storage features. 308 • Glove box . 309 • Bottle holders . 310 • Cup holders/ console tray 311 3-5. Other interior features Sun visors. 313 Vanity mirrors . 314 Clock 315 Power outlets 316 Seat heaters . 318 Floor mat 320 HomeLink®. 322 Compass 333 3 Interior features TABLE OF CONTENTS Index 4 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior. 336 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior 342 Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara® area 346 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements 348 General maintenance. 351 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 354 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions 355 Engine hood . 358 Engine compartment 360 Tires . 374 Tire inflation pressure. 382 Wheels . 386 Air conditioning filter. 389 Transmitter/ access key battery . 392 Checking and replacing fuses 397 Light bulbs 405 5-1. Essential information Hazard warning flashers. 418 If your vehicle needs to be towed. 419 If you think something is wrong 426 Fuel pump shut off system 427 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds. 428 If a warning message is displayed 440 If you have a flat tire . 457 If the engine will not start 471 If the select lever cannot be shifted from P 474 If you lose your keys. 475 If the access key does not operate properly . 476 If the battery is discharged 480 If your vehicle overheats. 485 If the vehicle becomes stuck . 488 4 Maintenance and care 5 When trouble arises 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) 492 Fuel information 505 Tire information. 509 6-2. Customization Customizable features 522 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 528 Seatbelt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 529 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 532 Abbreviation list 554 Alphabetical index. 555 What to do if. . 565 6 Vehicle specifications 7 For owners Index 6 Outside rear view mirrors P. 71 Engine hood P. 358 Windshield wipers P. 240 Headlights P. 233 Parking lights/daytime running lights P. 233 Front side marker lights P. 233 Turn signal lights P. 195 Front fog lights ∗ P. 239 Pictorial index Exterior Towing eyelet P. 419 Side under spoilers P. 170, 341 tS models Front under spoiler P. 170, 341 7 Tires ●Rotation ●Replacement ●Inflation pressure ●Information P. 374 P. 457 P. 382 P. 509 Doors P. 43 Fuel filler lid P. 78 Turn signal lights P. 195 Rear side marker lights P. 233 ∗: If equipped License plate lights P. 233 Towing eyelet P. 419 Towing eyelet P. 419 Rear view camera P. 248 Stop lights Rear window defogger P. 302 Trunk lid P. 46 Tail lights/stop lights P. 233 tS models Rear wing P. 269 Rear under spoilers P. 170, 341 8 Pictorial index Interior Power outlet P. 316 Head restraints P. 58 Seatbelts P. 60 Cup holders Console tray P. 311 P. 311 SRS side airbags P. 93 Front seats P. 53 Glove box P. 309 SRS curtain airbags Child restraint P. 93 anchor brackets P. 145 Display Audio system ∗, *1 Navigation system ∗, *2 SRS front passenger airbag P. 93 9 B A Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 69 Interior light P. 307 Vanity mirrors P. 314 Sun visors P. 313 ∗: If equipped *1: Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio system. *2: Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation system. Lock levers P. 44 Outside rear view mirror switch P. 71 Window lock switch P. 74 Power window switches P. 74 Power door lock switch P. 44 Microphone P. 305 10 ∗: If equipped C Pictorial index Interior Select lever ∗ Shift lever ∗ P. 185 P. 192 Parking brake lever P. 197 Vehicle stability control (VSC)/TRAC off switch P. 258, 259 Seat heater switches ∗ P. 318 “TRACK” switch P. 259 Power outlet P. 316 Shift lock release button ∗ P. 474 Driving pattern selector switch ∗ P. 187 11 Headlight switch Turn signal lever Fog light switch ∗ P. 233 P. 195 P. 239 Gauges and meters Multi-information display P. 199 P. 210, 218 Clock P. 315 Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 240 Hazard warning flasher switch P. 418 Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever P. 67 Floor mat ∗ P. 320 Engine hood lock release lever P. 358 Fuel filler lid opener P. 78 Push-button ignition switch (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) P. 172 AUX port ∗ USB port P. 304 P. 304 Pictorial index Instrument panel ∗: If equipped 12 A Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system Air conditioning system P. 286 Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P. 302 Air conditioning system P. 293 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch ∗/rear window defogger switch ∗ P. 302 Pictorial index Instrument panel 13 B Paddle shift levers ∗ P. 188, 190 Cruise control switch P. 243 Horn SRS driver airbag P. 198 P. 93 ∗: If equipped *1: Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio system. *2: Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation system. Talk switch *1, *2 Type A Type B Audio remote control switches *1, *2 Telephone switches *1, *2 Meter control switches ∗ P. 219 Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) P. 182 14 C Instrument panel light control dial P. 201 Trunk lid opener P. 46 Pictorial index Instrument panel 15 For your information Warranties ■ Warranties for U.S.A. SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties: ● SUBARU Limited Warranties ● Federal Emission Control Systems Warranties ● California Emissions Control Systems Warranties All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. ■ Warranties for Canada All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties: ● SUBARU Limited Warranty ● Emission Control System Warranty All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. ■ Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. 16 Main Owner’s Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the SUBARU policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to make changes on vehicles previously sold. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment. Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine Approximately five to ten hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your SUBARU A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for SUBARU vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that SUBARU does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your SUBARU vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine SUBARU products. Modification with non-genuine SUBARU products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. 17 Installation of a mobile two-way radio system The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: ● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system ● Cruise control system ● Anti-lock brake system ● SRS airbag system ● Seatbelt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your SUBARU dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. 18 Event data recorder This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. ● Disclosure of the EDR data SUBARU will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: • An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained • In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency • For use by SUBARU in a law suit However, if necessary, SUBARU may: • Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance • Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner 19 Scrapping of your SUBARU The SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner devices in your SUBARU contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seatbelt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your SUBARU dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seatbelt pretensioners, and transmitter batteries. WARNING ■General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. 20 Symbols used throughout this manual Warnings & Cautions Symbols used in illustrations WARNING This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others. CAUTION This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your SUBARU and its equipment. Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.” Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). Before driving 1 21 1-1. Key information Keys . 22 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Keyless access with push button start system 25 Remote keyless entry system . 38 Doors . 43 Trunk lid . 46 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats . 53 Rear seats 56 Head restraints. 58 Seatbelts 60 Steering wheel . 67 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror . 69 Outside rear view mirrors 71 1-4. Opening and closing the windows Power windows 74 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap . 78 1-6. Security system Engine immobilizer system . 82 Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) 86 Alarm 87 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture. 91 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag). 93 Front passenger occupant detection system 131 Child restraint systems. 141 Installing child restraints 145 22 1-1. Key information Keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Master keys Operating the remote keyless entry system (→P. 38) Valet key Key number plate Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system Access keys • Operating the keyless access with push button start system (→P. 25) • Operating the remote keyless entry system (→P. 38) Mechanical keys Key number plate 23 1-1. Key information 1 Before driving Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) To take out the mechanical key, push the release knob and take the key out. After using the mechanical key, store it in the access key. Carry the mechanical key together with the access key. If the access key battery is depleted or the “keyless access” entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P. 476) ■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant Turn the trunk lid opener main switch off as circumstances demand. (→P. 47) On vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system, provide the attendant with the valet key. On vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system, remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the access key only. ■Key number plate Keep the plate in a safe place, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key (without a keyless access with push button start system) or mechanical key (with a keyless access with push button start system) is lost, a new key can be made at your SUBARU dealer using the key number plate. (→P. 475) ■When riding in an aircraft When bringing a key with remote keyless entry system onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft. 24 1-1. Key information CAUTION ■To prevent key damage Observe the following: ●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. ●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time. ●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. ●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. ●Do not disassemble the keys. ●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key. ●Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as lowfrequency therapy equipment. ■Carrying the access key on your person (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Carry the access key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the access key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly. ■In case of a keyless access with push button start system malfunction or other key-related problems (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Take your vehicle with all the access keys provided with your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer. ■When a vehicle key is lost If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your SUBARU dealer immediately with all remaining access keys that were provided with your vehicle. 25 1 Before driving 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Keyless access with push button start system∗ The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the access key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the access key.) Unlocks and locks the doors (→P. 26) Unlocks the trunk lid (→P. 26) Starts the engine (→P. 172) Access key Access key Access key ∗: If equipped 26 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Unlocking and locking the doors Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors. Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked. Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors. Check that the door is securely locked. Unlocking the trunk lid Press the button to unlock the trunk lid. 27 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving Antenna location and effective range ■ Antenna location Antennas outside the cabin Antennas inside the cabin Antenna outside the trunk Antenna inside the trunk 28 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■ Effective range (areas within which the access key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors The system can be operated when the access key is within about 1.3 – 2.6 ft. (0.4 – 0.8 m) of either of the outside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) When unlocking the trunk lid The system can be operated when the access key is within about 1.3 – 2.6 ft. (0.4 – 0.8 m) of the trunk lid release button. When starting the engine or changing push-button ignition switch modes The system can be operated when the access key is inside the vehicle. 29 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice) ■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor ■Door lock buzzer If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (→P. 442, 446) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded. Use your palm to touch the lock sensor. 30 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the location of the access key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle may be unlocked.) ■Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the access key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. ●In the following situations, the keyless access with push button start system may take some time to unlock the doors. • The access key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer. • The keyless access with push button start system has not been used for 5 days or longer. ●If the keyless access with push button start system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any door except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the remote keyless entry system or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors. Alarm Situation Correction procedure Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open. Close all of the doors and lock the doors again. Interior alarm sounds continuously The push-button ignition switch was turned to “ACC” mode while the driver’s door was open (or the driver’s door was opened while the pushbutton ignition switch was in “ACC” mode). Turn the push-button ignition switch off and close the driver’s door. 31 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Conditions affecting operation The keyless access with push button start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the access key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the keyless access with push button start system, remote keyless entry system and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Way of coping →P. 476) ●When the access key battery is depleted ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ●When the access key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ●When another transmitters (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby ●When carrying the access key together with the following devices that emit radio waves • A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device • Another vehicle’s access key or a transmitter that emits radio waves • Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) • Digital audio players • Portable game systems ●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window ●When the access key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices 32 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■Notes for the “keyless access” entry function ●Even when the access key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases: • The access key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The access key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk lid is unlocked. • The access key is on the instrument panel, rear shelf or floor, in the door pockets or glove box or auxiliary box when the engine is started or push-button ignition switch modes are changed. ●Do not leave the access key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the access key inside the vehicle. ●As long as the access key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. ●Even if the access key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the access key is near the window. ●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the access key is within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. ●If the remote keyless entry system is used to lock the doors when the access key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the “keyless access” entry function. (Use the remote keyless entry system to unlock the doors.) ●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. 33 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Notes for locking the doors ●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again. ●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given. ●If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the access key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, place the access key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not stolen), and continue to wash the vehicle. ●If the access key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors. ●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again. ■Notes for the unlocking function ●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. ●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle again. ●If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the access key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, place the access key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not stolen), and continue to wash the vehicle. ●If there is another access key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped. 34 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods ●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the access key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ●The keyless access with push button start system can be deactivated in advance. (→P. 522) ■Alarm* (if equipped) Using the keyless access with push button start system to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (→P. 87) *: The alarm’s default setting is set to off. ■To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the access key when operating the system. Do not get the access key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the access key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.) ■If the keyless access with push button start system does not operate properly ●Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 476) ●Starting the engine: →P. 477 35 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Access key battery depletion ●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. ●If the battery charge becomes low, a buzzer will sound in the cabin and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the engine is stopped. (→P. 446) ●As the access key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the access key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the access key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 392) • The keyless access with push button start system or the remote keyless entry system does not operate. • The detection area becomes smaller. • The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on. ●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the access key close to any of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field: • TVs • Personal computers • Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers • Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones • Glass top ranges • Table lamps ■When the access key battery is fully depleted →P. 392 ■If the keyless access with push button start system has been deactivated in a customized setting ●Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid: Use the remote keyless entry system or mechanical key. (→P. 38, 476) ●Starting the engine and changing push-button ignition switch modes: →P. 477 ●Stopping the engine: →P. 479 ■Customization that can be configured at SUBARU dealer Settings (e. g. keyless access with push button start system) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 522) 36 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■Certification for keyless access with push button start system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAE FCC ID: HYQ14AHC FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF03 NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. For vehicles sold in Mexico Este equipo opera a título secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a título primario. IFT RLVDE1413-2269 14AHC DENSO 37 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving WARNING ■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the keyless access with push button start system antennas. (→P. 27) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the “keyless access” entry function can be disabled. Ask your SUBARU dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the “keyless access” entry function. ●Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your SUBARU dealer for details for disabling the “keyless access” entry function. 38 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Remote keyless entry system The remote keyless entry system can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Locks both side doors Check that the door is securely locked. Sounds the alarm (press and hold) Unlocks both side doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other door. Unlocks the trunk lid (press and hold) Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system Locks both side doors Check that the door is securely locked. Unlocks both side doors Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other door. Unlocks the trunk lid (press and hold) Sounds alarm (press and hold) 39 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice) Trunk lid: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk lid has been unlocked. ■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■Panic mode Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the transmitter. When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the access key. 40 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■Vehicle finder function Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system ■Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. A buzzer (sounds once) and the hazard warning flashers (flash 3 times) are used to inform the driver of the vehicle’s location. Press 3 times within 5 seconds while within a circumference of approximately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle. However, if the interval between the 3 presses is short, the system may not be activated.This setting must be customized at your SUBARU dealer. A buzzer (sounds once) and the hazard warning flashers (flash 3 times) are used to inform the driver of the vehicle’s location. Press 3 times within 5 seconds while within a circumference of approximately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle. However, if the interval between the 3 presses is short, the system may not be activated.This setting must be customized at your SUBARU dealer. 41 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Conditions affecting operation Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The remote keyless entry system may not operate normally in the following situations: ●When the transmitter battery is depleted ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication devices ●When the transmitter is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object ●When other transmitters (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby ●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system →P. 31 ■If the remote keyless entry system does not operate properly (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 476) ■Key battery depletion Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system If the remote keyless entry system does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 392) Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system →P. 35 ■When the access key battery is fully depleted →P. 392 ■Confirmation of the registered key number The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your SUBARU dealer for details. ■Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer Settings (e.g. remote keyless entry system) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 522) 42 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■Certification for remote keyless entry system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAA FCC ID: HYQ12BBY NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. 43 1 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Before driving Doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the “keyless access” entry function, remote keyless entry system, key or power door lock switch. ■ “Keyless access” entry function (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) →P. 26 ■ Remote keyless entry system →P. 38 ■ Key Turning the key operates the doors as follows: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Locks driver’s side door Unlocks driver’s side door Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (→P. 476) 44 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Locking the doors from the outside without a key Move the lock lever to the lock position. Close the door. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The door cannot be locked if the access key is left inside the vehicle. The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. ■ Power door lock switch Locks both side doors Unlocks both side doors ■ Lock lever Locks the door Unlocks the door STEP 1 STEP 2 45 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Window open/close function linked to door operation In order to make opening and closing the doors easier, completely closed windows are linked to door operations. Therefore, when a door is opened, its window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely. However, if the battery has discharged or is disconnected, this function will not operate. (→P. 484) ■If the keyless access with push button start system has been deactivated in a customized setting (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Use the remote keyless entry system or mechanical key. (→P. 38, 476) WARNING ■To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. ●Always use a seatbelt. ●Always lock both side doors. ●Ensure that both side doors are properly closed. ●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death. 46 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid Trunk lid The trunk lid can be opened using the key, trunk lid opener, “keyless access” entry function or remote keyless entry system. ■ Opening the trunk lid from inside the vehicle Press and hold the opener switch to release the trunk lid. If the trunk lid cannot be opened by the opener switch: →P. 47 ■ Opening the trunk lid from outside the vehicle Key (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) Turn the master key clockwise to release the trunk lid. “Keyless access” entry function (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) →P. 26 Remote keyless entry system →P. 38 47 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving Canceling the trunk lid opener feature To protect luggage stored in the trunk lid against theft, do the following: Turn the main switch in the trunk lid off to disable the trunk lid opener. On (The trunk lid can be opened using the trunk lid opener.) Off (The trunk lid cannot be opened using the trunk lid opener.) Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The trunk lid can only be opened with the master key. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: The trunk lid can only be opened with the mechanical key. 48 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid ■Trunk light The trunk light turns on when the trunk lid is opened. ■Function to prevent the trunk lid being locked with the access key inside (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ●When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the access key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the “keyless access” entry function. ●Even when the spare access key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk lid can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all access keys with you when leaving the vehicle. ●Even when the access key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk lid is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk lid. ●The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk lid using the trunk lid opener. ■Internal trunk lid release lever ■Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) The trunk lid can be also opened using the mechanical key. (→P. 476) The trunk lid can be opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed. 49 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving ■Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling the trunk lid opener main switch →P. 23 WARNING ■Caution while driving ●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit nearby objects while driving or luggage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving. ●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident. ●Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury. ■When children are in the vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Do not allow children to enter the trunk. If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate. ●Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid. 50 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid WARNING ■Using the trunk Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened. ●When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe. ●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk lid is about to open or close. ●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind. ●The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk. 51 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid 1 Before driving WARNING ●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after it is opened. ■Trunk lid damper stays Do not pull on or disassemble the trunk lid damper stays, or dispose of them in a fire. Illustrations on the trunk lid damper stays indicate the following: ●When closing the trunk lid, observe the following precautions: • Take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught. Except tS models • Do not place your hand(s) between the rear spoiler and trunk lid when closing the trunk lid. • To close the trunk lid, press the rear spoiler on either of the portions . tS models • Make sure to press the trunk lid lightly on its outer surface. • Do not hold or push the rear wing when closing the trunk lid. : Do not pull : Do not disassemble : Do not dispose of in fire 52 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid CAUTION ■Trunk lid damper stays The trunk lid is equipped with damper stays that hold the trunk lid in place. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to trunk lid damper stays, resulting in a malfunction. ●Do not attach any foreign objects such as stickers, plastic sheets and adhesives to damper stay rods. ●Do not touch damper stay rods with gloves or other fabric items. ●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine parts to the trunk lid. ●Do not apply lateral force to damper stays or place your hand on it. 53 1 Before driving 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats Getting in and out of the rear seats To get in and out of the rear seats, use the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold strap. ■ Before getting in or out of the rear seats Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt guide. (→P. 61) ■ Getting in the rear seats Lift the seatback angle adjustment lever. The seatback will fold forward. Front passenger seat only: The seat can be slid forward and backward. Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Vertical height adjustment lever (driver’s side only) Seatback fold strap 54 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Getting out of the rear seats Pull the seatback fold strap. The seatback will fold forward. Front passenger seat only: The seat can be slid forward and backward. ■ After getting in or out of the rear seats Return the seatback to the upright position until the seat locks. Front passenger seat only: The seat will lock in position at the point where the seatback reaches the upright position. ■Seat dust cover Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of purchase before using the seat. WARNING ■Seat adjustment ●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. 55 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving WARNING ●After adjusting the seat, push it slightly to make sure it is securely locked. If the seat is not securely locked, it may move or the seatbelt may not operate properly. ●Take care not to hit passengers with the seat. When sliding the seat rearward, make sure not to squash the legs of the rear passengers. ●When returning the seatback upright, perform seatback angle adjustment while holding down the seatback. ●Do not pull on or use the seatbelt guide to adjust or fold the front seat. ■When driving the vehicle Never operate the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold strap. Doing so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■Getting in and out of the rear seats ●When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to get your hands, legs, etc. squashed in the movable or connecting parts. ●When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to trip on the seat rails. ●After getting in or out of the rear seats, always make sure the front seat is locked in position. ■When operating the front seat from the rear seat Make sure that no passenger is seated in the front seat. CAUTION ■When getting in and out the vehicle Do not rub your back against the side support pad of backrest. Otherwise surface of the side support pad is damaged early. You can move the seat backward to prevent the contact. 56 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Rear seats ■Seat dust cover Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of purchase before using the seat. The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down. Pull the both left and right seatback lock release straps in the trunk lid to fold down the seatback. To return the seatbacks to its original position, lift it up until it locks. 57 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving WARNING ■When folding the rear seatbacks down Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving. ●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the select lever to P (automatic transmission) or shift lever to neutral (manual transmission). ●Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driving. ●Do not allow children to enter the trunk. ■After returning the rear seatback to the upright position Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Check that the seatbelts are not twisted or caught in the seatback. ■Before using the rear seatbelts ●Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red portion of the seatback lock indicator will be visible. Make sure that the red portion is not visible. ●Always make sure that the seatbelt is not caught in the seatback or twisted in one of the hooks that secure the seatback. Failure to do so may cause the seatbelt to not be fastened correctly or to become ineffective in a collision, resulting in serious injury. 58 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Head restraints ■Removing the head restraints ■Installing the head restraints Head restraints are provided for front seats. Up Pull the head restraints up. Down Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button. Lock release button Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button. Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. 59 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving ■Adjusting the height of the head restraints WARNING ■Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. ●Do not drive with the head restraints removed. Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. 60 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seatbelts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seatbelts before driving the vehicle. ■ Correct use of the seatbelts ● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ● Do not twist the seatbelt. ■ Fastening and releasing the seatbelt Fasten the seatbelt Push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. Release the seatbelt Press the release button. As the seatbelt is retracted automatically, make sure that it is not tangled or twisted. Release button 61 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving Front seatbelt guide To enable the seatbelt to be easily extended, pass the seatbelt through the guide. When getting in or out of the rear seats, release the seatbelt from the guide. Seatbelt pretensioners (front seats) The pretensioner helps the seatbelt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seatbelt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover. The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal or side impact or a rear impact. 62 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. ■Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 145) ■Child seatbelt usage The seatbelts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult size. ●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seatbelt. (→P. 141) ●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seatbelt, follow the instructions on P. 60 regarding seatbelt usage. ■Seatbelt pretensioners ●Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in a rear impact or minor frontal or side impact. ●The following four components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is involved in a rollover accidents. • Seatbelt pretensioner for driver • Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger • SRS curtain airbag for driver’s seat side • SRS curtain airbag for front passenger’s seat side 63 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving ●The following four components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal collision. • Seatbelt pretensioner for driver • Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger • SRS front airbag for driver • SRS front airbag for front passenger* *: This does not operate while the occupant detection system determines to deactivate the airbag operation. For details, refer to “Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” (→P. 101) ●The following two components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is subjected to a severe collision on the driver’s seat side of the vehicle. • Seatbelt pretensioner for driver • Side airbag for driver ●The following two components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is subjected to a severe collision on the front passenger’s seat side of the vehicle. • Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger • Side airbag for front passenger ●Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be replaced only by SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies for the front seating positions, use only genuine SUBARU parts equipped with a load limiter. ●If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ●If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ●When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this section. ■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. 64 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) WARNING Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ■Wearing a seatbelt ●Ensure that all passengers wear a seatbelt. ●Always wear a seatbelt properly. ●Each seatbelt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seatbelt for more than one person at once, including children. ●SUBARU recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seatbelt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seatbelt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ●Always wear your seatbelt low and snug across your hips. ■Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seatbelt in the proper way. (→P. 60) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seatbelt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. 65 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving WARNING ■People with a medical condition Obtain medical advice and wear the seatbelt in the proper way. ■When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seatbelt. If the seatbelt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■Seatbelt pretensioners If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS airbag system warning light will come on. In that case, the seatbelt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your SUBARU dealer. 66 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) WARNING ■Seatbelt damage and wear ●Do not damage the seatbelts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. ●Inspect the seatbelt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Replace a damaged seatbelt immediately. Damaged seatbelts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. ●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seatbelt does not function correctly, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer. ●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there’s no obvious damage. ●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seatbelts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your SUBARU dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury. ■When using the seatbelt guide ●Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the guide. ●Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seatbelt guide button. ●Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully. ■Before using the rear seatbelts ●Always make sure that the seatbelt is not caught in the seatback or twisted in one of the hooks that secure the seatback. Failure to do so may cause the seatbelt to not be fastened correctly or to become ineffective in a collision, resulting in serious injury. 67 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Before driving Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position. Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down. Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically. After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel. STEP 1 STEP 2 68 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) WARNING ■Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■After adjusting the steering wheel ●Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. ●Do not put any objects (including straps or cords) over the steering wheel pad, steering column cover, or dashboard. • These objects could become entangled in the steering wheel, preventing the SRS front airbag, etc. from operating properly. • If the SRS front airbag deploys, these objects could become projectiles, causing injury. 69 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Before driving Anti-glare inside rear view mirror Adjusting the height of rear view mirror Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down. Anti-glare function Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever. Normal position Anti-glare position The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver’s seating posture. 70 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision. Press the switch to turn the auto-dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch’s green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. WARNING ■Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 71 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Before driving Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch. Select a mirror to adjust. Left Right Adjust the mirror. Up Right Down Left STEP 1 STEP 2 72 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Folding the mirrors Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear. ■The mirrors can be adjusted when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode. ■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P. 302) 73 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) 1 Before driving WARNING ■When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. ●Do not drive with the mirrors folded. ●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. ■When a mirror is moving To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror. ■When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you. 74 1-4. Opening and closing the windows Power windows Window lock switch Press the switch down to lock the passenger window glasses. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows: Closing One-touch closing* Opening One-touch opening* *: Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway. 75 1-4. Opening and closing the windows 1 Before driving ■The power windows can be operated when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode. ■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ACC” mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened. ■Jam protection function If an object becomes caught between the window and the body, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. 76 1-4. Opening and closing the windows ■When the power window does not close normally If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, close all the doors perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: After stopping the vehicle, the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: After stopping the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode. Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position two consecutive times. Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again and continue holding for 1 second or more after the window closes completely. If you push the power window switch to the opening position while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, we recommend that you have your SUBARU dealer. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 77 1-4. Opening and closing the windows 1 Before driving WARNING ■Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. ●Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury. The driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the power windows. ●Vehicle without a keyless access with push button start system: Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the engine switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. ●Vehicle with a keyless access with push button start system: Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the push-button ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. ■Jam protection function ●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes. 78 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap: ■ Before refueling the vehicle ● Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. ● Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. ● Confirm the type of fuel. (→P. 79) ■ Opening the fuel tank cap Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler lid. Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open. STEP 1 STEP 2 79 1-5. Refueling 1 Before driving Closing the fuel tank cap After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction. Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler lid. STEP 3 ■Fuel types Unleaded gasoline (93 AKI [98 RON] or higher) If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. 80 1-5. Refueling WARNING ■Refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Do not handle fuel indoors. ●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling. ●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury. ●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank. ●Do not allow anyone to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress. ●Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. ●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. ●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. 81 1-5. Refueling 1 Before driving WARNING ■When refueling Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank: ●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck ●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off ●Do not top off the fuel tank ●Observe other precautions that are posted at the service station. ●Turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard. ■When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. CAUTION ■Refueling ●Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface. ●Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system. ●Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance. 82 1-6. Security system Engine immobilizer system The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the system has been canceled. 83 1-6. Security system 1 Before driving ■When the vehicle cannot be started with the registered key (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) Remove the key and try again. ■System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system. ■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ●If the key is in contact with a metallic object ●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The indicator light flashes after the push-button ignition switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating. The indicator light stops flashing after the push-button ignition switch has been turned to “ACC” or “ON” mode to indicate that the system has been canceled. 84 1-6. Security system ■Certification for engine immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB03 FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. For vehicles sold in Mexico Este equipo opera a título secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a título primario. 85 1-6. Security system 1 Before driving CAUTION ■To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 86 1-6. Security system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law. 87 1 1-6. Security system Before driving Alarm∗ The alarm’s default setting is set to off. To use the alarm, perform the activating the alarm system procedures. The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is detected. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered when a locked door or the trunk lid is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the “keyless access” entry function or remote keyless entry system while the alarm is set. ■ Setting the alarm system Close the doors and/or trunk lid and perform one of the following: ● Lock the doors using the “keyless access” entry function. ● Lock the doors using the remote keyless entry system. ● Lock the doors from the outside without using a key. (→P. 44) The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds or more elapse. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. ∗: If equipped 88 1-6. Security system Activating/deactivating the alarm system Check that both side doors and the trunk lid are closed. Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode. Open the driver’s door while pressing and holding on the power door lock switch and continue to press for approximately 10 seconds after the driver’s door has opened. The alarm system changes between activated and deactivated as follows. ■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm Perform one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm: ● Unlock the doors using the “keyless access” entry function. ● Unlock the doors using the remote keyless entry system. ● Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Alarm status Horn Multi-information display Deactivated Sounds twice AL oF Activated Sounds once AL on 89 1-6. Security system 1 Before driving ■System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system. ■Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following. ●Nobody is in the vehicle. ●The windows are closed before the alarm is set. ●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. ■Opening and closing the trunk lid ●If the alarm setting operations are performed with the trunk lid left open, the alarm will not be set. After closing the trunk lid, the alarm is set after 30 seconds or more elapse. ●When the trunk lid is unlocked using the “keyless access” entry function or remote keyless entry system while the alarm is set, the alarm goes into standby mode. After closing the trunk lid, the alarm is set again after 30 seconds or more elapse. ■Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system. ●A person inside the vehicle opens a door or the trunk lid. ●The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. 90 1-6. Security system ■When the battery is disconnected Be sure to deactivate the alarm system. If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected. ■Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer Settings (e.g. alarm system) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 522) CAUTION ■To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 91 1 Before driving 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture Drive with a good posture as follows: Sit upright and well back in the seat. (→P. 53) Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (→P. 53) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. (→P. 53) Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel to allow easy operation and to ensure the airbag is facing your chest. (→P. 67) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 58) Wear the seatbelt correctly. (→P. 60) 92 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■While driving ●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. ●Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ■Adjusting the seat position ●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. 93 1 1-7. Safety information Before driving SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seatbelts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts. Models with SRS airbags and shoulder restraints for driver, front passenger, and rear passengers Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a shoulder belt at each front seating positions and each rear seating positions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of six airbags. The configurations are as follows. 94 1-7. Safety information ■When you sell your vehicle When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting the buyer to the applicable section in this Owner’s Manual. WARNING ■SRS airbag ●To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to “Seatbelts”. (→P. 60) Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal airbags Driver’s and front passenger’s side airbags Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and rear passengers) These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners”. (→P. 61) 95 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■SRS airbag ●Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed – faster than the blink of an eye – and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident braking. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force. ●The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. ●Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury. ●Do not put any objects (including straps or cords) over the steering wheel pad, steering column cover, or dashboard. • These objects could become entangled in the steering wheel, preventing the SRS front airbag, etc. from operating properly. • If the SRS front airbag deploys, these objects could become projectiles, causing injury. 96 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■SRS airbag ●Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to “Child restraint systems”. (→P. 141) 97 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■SRS airbag ●NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. ●Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passenger’s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child. ●When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly. ●A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas. 98 1-7. Safety information SRS airbag system components Front sub sensor (right-hand side) SRS airbag system warning light Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) (two-stage) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator (center of instrument panel) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side) (twostage) Front passenger’s occupant detection control module Door impact sensor (righthand side) Curtain airbag module (righthand side) Airbag wiring Side airbag module (front passenger’s side) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s side) Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats) Front passenger’s occupant detection system sensor Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s side) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side) 99 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant detection control module etc. The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag control module. The airbag control module consists of an airbag sensor. In certain types of severe front or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side) Side airbag module (driver’s side) Door impact sensor (lefthand side) Airbag control module (including impact sensors and rollover sensors) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) Curtain airbag module (lefthand side) ■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases. ●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ●The windshield may crack. 100 1-7. Safety information SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment. Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel. The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark. In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy. ● SRS frontal airbag for driver ● SRS frontal airbag for front passenger These components supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact to the occupant’s head and chest. 101 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ■Driver’s SRS frontal airbag The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates. NOTE The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. ■Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. The occupant detection system sensor is installed under the seat upholstery and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not. The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner operates with the driver’s seatbelt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners”. (→P. 61) Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail. ●Do not apply any strong impact to the front passenger’s seat. ●Do not spill liquid on the front passenger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately. ●Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger’s seat. ●Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s seat. ●Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat. ●Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle. 102 1-7. Safety information If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger’s occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer. NOTE The front passenger’s SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. ■Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators →P. 131 ■Occupant detection system The occupant detection system sensor is installed under the seat upholstery and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not. If the front passenger’s seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. If the seat cushion is wet, the front passenger should stop sitting on the front passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from the seat immediately, let the seat dry naturally and then check the SRS airbag system warning light as follows. ●If the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates, keep the seat dry until the warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag system warning light stays on even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger’s seat and have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. ●If the SRS airbag system warning light does not illuminate, check that the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators work properly. If the indicators do not work properly, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger’s seat and have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. 103 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger’s seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly. When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passenger’s seat. NOTE This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. This device may cause interference. If this device causes interference, consult the nearest SUBARU dealer. Also, for maintenance of the system, consult the nearest SUBARU dealer. ■Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is not activated The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger’s seat: ●The seat is empty. ●The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an infant is restrained in it. ●The occupant changed their posture after the occupant load is judged. ●The front passenger’s occupant detection system is malfunctioning. WARNING When the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant detection system, activating the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by the infant in the child restraint system. ●Do not place any article (including electronic devices) on the seat other than the infant in the child restraint system. ●Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system. 104 1-7. Safety information ■If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) if the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat). Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By referring to the child restraint manufacturer’s recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in “Child restraint systems” (→P. 141), correctly install the child restraint system. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition switch to the “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) and make sure that the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions. ●Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant. ●Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger’s seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passenger’s seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupant’s seating posture. The child should always wear the seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off), take the following actions. 105 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ●Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant. If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. ■Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger’s seat. ●When the seat is occupied by an adult. ●When a certain item(s) (e.g. jug of water) is placed on the seat. 106 1-7. Safety information ■If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an adult This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition switch to the “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, take the following actions. ●Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch off. ●Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat cover, seat heater or massager, etc. ●If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a rear seat. ●Next, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off. If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. 107 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ■How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors. Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Dealer Services Department P.O. Box 6000 Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783) Subaru Hawaii 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu, HI 96819-4467 808-839-2273 Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automobile 491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1 Dededo, Guam 96921-6225 671-633-2698 Trebol Motors P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00910 787-793-2828 Subaru Canada, Inc. Consumer Support Department 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4J7 1-800-894-4212 There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle. 108 1-7. Safety information ■Operation Driver’s side Passenger’s side SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed. SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed. 109 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depending on the characteristic of the item(s) or person on the front passenger’s seat monitored by the front passenger’s occupant detection system sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system. If the front sub sensors and the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s module or both driver’s and front passenger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of the item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a nonaccident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver’s ability to maintain control of the vehicle. When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. 110 1-7. Safety information The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they are not designed to deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents because deployment of only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags would not help the occupant in those situations. The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself. ■Example of accident in which the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speeds of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above. 111 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ■Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy ■Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb). The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole. 112 1-7. Safety information The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck. The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact. The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision. The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle. 113 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ■Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will basically not deploy The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed not to deploy in most cases if the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. First impact Second impact In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the driver’s and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag( s) will deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, once either or both of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are activated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact. 114 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■If the SRS airbags deploy Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment. ■Child restraint precautions NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passenger’s seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children. 115 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants. The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the top of each front and rear pillar. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s head. If the vehicle is extremely inclined such as when it is involved in a rollover accident, the SRS curtain airbags will deploy along with the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners to help reduce the impact to the occupants’ heads. Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU SRS curtain airbag system that complies with Federal Motor Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226. 116 1-7. Safety information ■Operation The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS front airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel. A rollover sensor is also located inside the airbag control module. An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the left and right center pillars, doors and rear wheel houses. Another impact sensor, which also senses impact force, is located under the center of the rear seats. If the impact sensor that is located under the center of the rear seats and one of the center pillar impact sensors or door impact sensors together sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the same side senses an impact. If the impact sensor that is located under the center of the rear seats and one of the rear wheel house impact sensors together sense an impact force above a predetermined level, the control module causes only the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate. If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the vehicle, the control module inflates the SRS curtain airbags. At this time, the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners also operate at the same time. 117 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied. When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser side impact. Also, they are not designed to deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts because SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not help the occupant in those situations. The SRS curtain airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state. Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself. 118 1-7. Safety information ■Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy ■Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag. The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof. The side of the vehicle raises above a certain threshold or the vehicle skids and its tires hit a curbstone laterally. 119 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ■Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. The vehicle is involved in an oblique sideon impact. The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment. 120 1-7. Safety information ■Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of an accident like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident force involved. The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object. The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle. The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof. 121 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ■Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will basically not deploy The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision, is struck from behind or pitches end over end. Examples of such accidents are illustrated. The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or stationary). The vehicle is struck from behind. The vehicle pitches end over end. 122 1-7. Safety information In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second. SRS curtain airbag SRS side airbag Second impact First impact 123 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■If the SRS airbags deploy Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment. After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag system (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment. ■SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag precautions The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position. ■When to contact your SUBARU dealer In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. ●The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. 124 1-7. Safety information ●A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain airbags to inflate. ●The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ●The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged. 125 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seatbelts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seatbelts. ●The driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat. 126 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■SRS airbag precautions ●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. ●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seatbelt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. SUBARU strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 141) ●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. ●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. ●Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees. ●Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars. 127 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■SRS airbag precautions ●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. ●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (→P. 98). Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. ●Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard or steering wheel pad. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver and front passenger airbags deploy. ●Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, rear quarter glass, front and rear pillar or roof side rail. 128 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■SRS airbag precautions ●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. ●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your SUBARU dealer. ■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. ●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags. ●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails. ●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment. ●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches. ●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system. ●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players. ●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability. 129 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving SRS airbag system monitors A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The following components are monitored by the indicator: ● Front sub sensor (right-hand side) ● Front sub sensor (left-hand side) ● Airbag control module (including impact sensors and rollover sensors) ● Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) ● Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side) ● Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side) ● Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side) ● Door impact sensor (right-hand side) ● Door impact sensor (left-hand side) Vehicles with a monochrome multiinformation display Vehicles with a color multi-information display 130 1-7. Safety information ● Side airbag module (driver’s side) ● Side airbag module (front passenger’s side) ● Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side) ● Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side) ● Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) ● Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) ● Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats) ● Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) ● Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s side) ● Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s side) ● Front passenger’s occupant detection system sensor ● Front passenger’s occupant detection control module ● Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator ● All related wiring WARNING ■SRS warning light If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners, SRS airbag system and/or front passenger occupant detection system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners, SRS airbag system and/or front passenger occupant detection system will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury. ●Flashing or flickering of the warning light ●No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the “ON” position. ●Continuous illumination of the warning light ●Illumination of the warning light while driving 131 1 1-7. Safety information Before driving Front passenger occupant detection system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant detection system. Using the sensors installed under the seat cover, the system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the frontal airbag for front passenger seat. The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is not a malfunction. If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger’s occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Immediately contact your SUBARU dealer and have your vehicle inspected. Do not use the front passenger seat while driving to your SUBARU dealer. SRS airbag system warning light Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light “AIR BAG ON” indicator light 132 1-7. Safety information The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system), both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during the system check. After the system check, both the ON and OFF indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Then, either the ON or OFF indicator illuminates depending on the condition of the front passenger’s frontal airbag. When the OFF indicator remains off and ON indicator illuminates, the front passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. When the OFF indicator illuminates and ON indicator remains off, the front passenger’s frontal airbag does not deploy during a collision. If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators remain on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system), or the indicators remain off after the system check, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag monitoring system. 133 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system*1 ■ Adult*2 ■ Child restraint system with infant*6, *7, *8 Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG ON” SRS airbag system warning light Off Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light Flashing*3 Devices Front passenger airbag On Front side airbag*4 Front curtain airbag*4 Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner*4 Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”*9 SRS airbag system warning light Off Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light Devices Front passenger airbag Off Front side airbag*4 Front curtain airbag*4 On Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner*4 134 1-7. Safety information ■ Child*5, *7 ■ Unoccupied ■ There is a malfunction in the system Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” or “AIR BAG ON”*5 SRS airbag system warning light Off Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light Off or flashing*3, *5 Devices Front passenger airbag Off or on*5 Front side airbag*4 Front curtain airbag*4 On Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner*4 Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” SRS airbag system warning light Off Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light Devices Front passenger airbag Off Front side airbag*4 Front curtain airbag*4 On Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner*4 Indicator/ warning light “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF” SRS airbag system warning light On Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light Off Devices Front passenger airbag Off Front side airbag*4 Front curtain airbag*4 On Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner*4 135 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving *1: The occupant detection system does not operate during selfchecking. *2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture. *3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seatbelt. *4: The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the occupant detection system. *5: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. *6: When a child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, do not place any article on the seat other than the child occupant and a child restraint system. Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant detection system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail. *7: Do not place more than one child on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant detection system from functioning correctly. *8: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. See the caution that follows regarding installation of a child restraint system. (→P. 145) *9: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 145) 136 1-7. Safety information If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an adult This can be caused by an adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. Perform the following. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch off. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly wear the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: The push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode. If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, perform the following. • Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch off. • Make sure that the front passenger is not using a blanket, seat cushion, seat cover or seat heater, etc. • If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger seat, or should sit in a rear seat. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 137 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or the pushbutton ignition switch to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). The ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during the system check and after the system check is performed, the ON and OFF indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Then, the OFF indicator remains off while the ON indicator is illuminated. If the ON indicator remains off and the OFF indicator is illuminated, move the occupant to the rear seat backwards and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected. If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat) This can be caused by the child restraint system being installed incorrectly. Perform the following. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch off. Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By referring to the child restraint manufacturer’s recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedure in “child restraint system”, correctly reinstall the child restraint system. STEP 5 STEP 1 STEP 2 138 1-7. Safety information Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The engine switch is turned to the “ON” position and make sure that the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: The push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode and make sure that the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off, perform the following. • Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant. • Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking the relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 139 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■Front passenger occupant detection system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant detection system. Failure to do so may cause the occupant detection system to not function correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. ●Wear the seatbelt properly. ●Do not apply excessive force to the seat. ●Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery. ●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. ●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. ●Do not spill liquid on the front passenger seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately and dry the seat. If the airbag warning light illuminates, dry the seat until the warning light turns off. If the airbag warning light stays on even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger seat and have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. If the airbag warning light does not illuminate, check that the airbag ON/OFF indicator light works properly. If the indicator light does not work properly, do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger’s seat and have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ●Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger seat. Also, do not replace or modify the seat upholstery or foam inside the seat. ●Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s seat. ●Do not place a magnetized items near the seatbelt buckle. 140 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■Front passenger occupant detection system precautions ●Never install a rearward facing child seat in the front passenger’s seat even if the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is deactivated. Be sure to install it in the rear seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the rear seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the rear seat. This is because children sitting in the front passenger’s seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploy. SUBARU believes that the rear seats are the safest place for children ●If luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger seat, the OFF indicator may turn off and the ON indicator may illuminate. If this occurs, the front passenger’s airbag may deploy during a collision. If this is not desirable, remove the luggage or electronic devices from the front passenger seat. ●Modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the front passenger occupant detection system. (U.S. only) Removing, replacing or modifying any parts of the front seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tires, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU front passenger occupant detection system. 141 1 1-7. Safety information Before driving Child restraint systems Points to remember Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. ● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child. ● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (→P. 145) Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. 142 1-7. Safety information Forward facing  Convertible seat Booster seat ■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system ●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seatbelt. ●If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seatbelt. (→P. 60) ■Where to place a child restraint system The following are SUBARU’s recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle. Front passenger’s seat Rear seat seating positions 143 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving ●Front passenger’s seat Do not install a child restraint system (including a booster cushion) due to the hazard to children posed by the passenger’s airbag. ●Rear seat seating positions Recommended installing positions for the child restraint systems. In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system. • Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seatbelts • ISOFIX anchor bars • Top tether anchorages Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. WARNING ■Child restraint precautions ●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seatbelt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior. ●SUBARU strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. ●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. 144 1-7. Safety information WARNING ■Child restraint precautions ●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. ●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident. ■When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seatbelt. If the seatbelt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt. ■When the child restraint system is not in use ●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment. ●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. 145 1 1-7. Safety information Before driving Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seatbelt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint. The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system. Child restraint LATCH anchors LATCH anchors are provided for both rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.) Seatbelts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seatbelt) (→P. 60) Anchor bracket (for top tether strap) Anchor brackets are provided for both rear seats. 146 1-7. Safety information Installation with LATCH system Type A Pull the cover. Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 147 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving Type B Pull the cover. Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 148 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints using a seatbelt (child restraint lock function belt) ■ Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle. Run the seatbelt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 149 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. ■ Forward facing  Convertible seat Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Run the seatbelt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended. STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 150 1-7. Safety information While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 151) ■ Booster seat Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seatbelt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 60) STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 1 STEP 2 151 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving Removing a child restraint installed with a seatbelt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seatbelt. Child restraint systems with a top tether strap Secure the child restraint using a seatbelt or the LATCH anchors. Remove the anchor bracket cover. Store the removed cover in a safe place. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap. Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 152 1-7. Safety information ■When installing a child restraint system with LATCH anchors and a top tether strap Depending on the child restraint system’s size and shape, if the child restraint system is installed to the LATCH anchors first, it may not be possible to attach the top tether strap to the anchor bracket. In that case, first temporarily attach the top tether strap to the anchor bracket, install the child restraint system using the lower anchors and then tighten the top tether strap. ■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819. WARNING ■When installing a booster seat To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 62) ■When installing a child restraint system Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat. ●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system. 153 1-7. Safety information 1 Before driving WARNING ■When installing a child restraint system ●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seatbelt is not twisted. ●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. ●When adjusting the front passenger seat position after installing a child restraint system, do so slowly. ●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. ■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seatbelt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident. 154 1-7. Safety information When driving 2 155 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle 156 Push-button ignition switch. 172 Engine (ignition) switch 182 Automatic transmission 185 Manual Transmission. 192 Turn signal lever 195 Parking brake. 197 Horn . 198 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters . 199 Indicators and warning lights 203 Multi-information display (monochrome display) . 210 Multi-information display (color display) 218 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch. 233 Fog light switch 239 Windshield wipers and washer . 240 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control. 243 Rear view camera 248 Driving assist systems . 257 Hill start assist 264 Rear wing. 269 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage 272 Vehicle load limits 276 Winter driving tips 277 Trailer towing . 282 Dinghy towing 283 156 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving: ■ Starting the engine →P. 172, 182 ■ Driving Vehicles with an automatic transmission With the brake pedal depressed, shift the select lever to D. (→P. 185) Release the parking brake. (→P. 197) Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1. (→P. 192) Release the parking brake. (→P. 197) Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. ■ Stopping Vehicles with an automatic transmission With the select lever in D, depress the brake pedal. If necessary, set the parking brake. If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the select lever to P or N. (→P. 185) Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal. If necessary, set the parking brake. If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to neutral. (→P. 192) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1 STEP 2 157 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■ Parking the vehicle Vehicles with an automatic transmission With the select lever in D, depress the brake pedal. Shift the select lever to P. (→P. 185) Set the parking brake. (→P. 197) Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Press the push-button ignition switch to stop the engine. Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed. Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal. Shift the shift lever to neutral. (→P. 192) Set the parking brake. (→P. 197) Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Press the push-button ignition switch to stop the engine. Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the wheels as needed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 158 2-1. Driving procedures Starting off on a steep uphill Vehicles with an automatic transmission Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the select lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake. Vehicles with a manual transmission With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to 1. Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal. Release the parking brake. ■When starting off on an uphill When enabled, the hill start assist system can operate. (→P. 264) ■Driving in the rain ●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. ●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 159 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission) In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. ●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill ●When the accelerator pedal is released ●When driving on curves ●When the brake pedal is firmly depressed ■New vehicle break-in driving (the first 1000 miles [1600 km]) The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1000 miles (1600 km): ●Do not allow the engine speed to exceed 4000 rpm except in an emergency. ●Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow. ●Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency. ●Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency. The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones. ■Replacement of brake pad and lining The front disc brake and the rear disc brake have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied. If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. 160 2-1. Driving procedures ■Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows. Brake pad and lining While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times. Parking brake lining Drive the vehicle at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N, 15.3 kgf]). Drive the vehicle for approximately 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat this procedure. Check the parking brake lever travel. If the parking brake lever travel is out of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake lever. Parking brake lever travel: →P. 501 ■High friction brake pads (if equipped) The brake pads and discs are designed for use under high load conditions. Therefore, brake noise may be generated depending on the vehicle speed, braking force and vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.). ■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your SUBARU dealer perform the bedding down. (→P. 160) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 161 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■After the engine starts In order to secure a rich exhaust sound when starting the vehicle and environmental performance, air intake and exhaust sounds become loud and vibrations may increase for a little while after the engine starts. This is not a malfunction. ■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (→P. 495) ■REV indicator WARNING ■When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission) ●Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ●Firmly depress the brake pedal because engine speed may increase immediately after starting the engine, when the air conditioning system is operating, when turning the steering wheel, etc., thereby causing creeping to become stronger. Apply the parking brake as necessary. When the set engine speed is reached the REV indicator comes on and a buzzer sounds to inform the driver. (→P. 215, 228) (When the engine speed enters the red zone, the REV indicator flashes regardless of settings.) 162 2-1. Driving procedures WARNING ■When driving the vehicle ●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby. ●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll backward while the select lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the select lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. ●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk lid is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ●On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ●Do not shift the select lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control. 163 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving WARNING ●On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may propel the vehicle forward, possibly causing an accident. ●Moving the select lever to N (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever to neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N or neutral is selected. ●During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 186, 192) ●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting in death or serious injury. ●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury. ●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. 164 2-1. Driving procedures WARNING ■When driving on slippery road surfaces ●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. ●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. ●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident. ■When shifting the select lever or shift lever ●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the select lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the select lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. ●Do not place items in the select lever’s or shift lever’s surrounding area. It may cause incorrect operation. ●If the select lever’s or shift lever’s boot is pulled out during cleaning, return it to its previous position. If the select lever’s or shift lever’s boot is left pulled out, the select lever or shift lever may become difficult to operate. ■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have your SUBARU dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. (→P. 159) ■Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driving. 165 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving WARNING ■When the vehicle is stopped ●Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N (vehicles with an automatic transmission only) or neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission), the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident. ●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. ●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary. ●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed. ●Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby. 166 2-1. Driving procedures WARNING ■When the vehicle is parked ●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following: • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components. ●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire. ●Do not attach suction cups to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Suction cups or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle. ●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire. ●Always apply the parking brake, shift the select lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. ●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns. ●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. 167 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving WARNING ■Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ●The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your SUBARU dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. ■When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the select lever or shift lever, or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. 168 2-1. Driving procedures WARNING ■When braking ●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. ●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. ●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. ●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately. CAUTION ■Pre-driving check Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine. ■When driving the vehicle Vehicles with an automatic transmission ●If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction. ●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill. 169 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving CAUTION Vehicles with a manual transmission ●If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction. ●Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting, do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears. ●Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged. • Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. Doing so may cause clutch trouble. • Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and moving forward. Doing so may damage the clutch. • Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade. Doing so may damage the clutch. ●Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears. ●Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may damage the transmission. ■When parking the vehicle ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Always shift the select lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. Also set the parking brake. ●When parking the vehicle, be careful not to contact a wheel stop, etc. as doing so may damage the bumpers, underside of the vehicle, etc. 170 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor. ●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. ●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat. ■Avoiding damage to the under spoilers (tS models) On vehicles with under spoilers, be careful when driving, as the ground clearance will be lower than a vehicle without them as follows: ●Front under spoiler: Ground clearance at the front of each front wheel arch and the center of the front bumper is lower by approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) and 1.6 in. (4 cm), respectively. ●Side under spoilers: Ground clearance at the sides of the vehicle is lower by approximately 1.2 in. (3 cm). ●Rear under spoilers: Ground clearance at each corner of the rear bumper is lower by approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm). ■Replacement of brake pad and lining If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or replacement. ■Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and gently. 171 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving CAUTION ■If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ●It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations. ●The vehicle will lean abnormally. Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 457) ■When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle: ●Engine stalling ●Short in electrical components ●Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your SUBARU dealer check the following: ●Brake function ●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc. ●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. 172 2-1. Driving procedures Push-button ignition switch (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Performing the following operations when carrying the access key on your person starts the engine or changes push-button ignition switch modes. ■ Starting the engine Vehicles with an automatic transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the select lever is set in P. If the select lever is not set in P, the engine may not be started. (→P. 185) Firmly depress the brake pedal. The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be started. Press the push-button ignition switch shortly and firmly. When operating the push-button ignition switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 10 seconds, whichever is less. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started. The engine can be started from any push-button ignition switch mode. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 173 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving Vehicles with a manual transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in neutral. Firmly depress the clutch pedal. The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be started. Press the push-button ignition switch shortly and firmly. When operating the push-button ignition switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch. The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 10 seconds, whichever is less. Continue depressing the clutch pedal until the engine is completely started. The engine can be started from any push-button ignition switch mode. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 174 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Stopping the engine Vehicles with an automatic transmission Stop the vehicle. Shift the select lever to P. Set the parking brake. (→P. 197) Release the brake pedal. Press the push-button ignition switch. Check that the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) is off. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 175 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, stop the vehicle. Shift the shift lever to neutral. Set the parking brake. (→P. 197) Release the clutch pedal. Press the push-button ignition switch. Check that the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) is off. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 176 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Changing push-button ignition switch mode Modes can be changed by pressing the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmission) released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) Off* The hazard warning flashers can be used. The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) is off. “ACC” mode Some electrical components such as the power outlet can be used. The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) flashes slowly. “ON” mode All electrical components can be used. The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) flashes slowly. *: Vehicles with an automatic transmission: If the select lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the push-button ignition switch will be turned to “ACC” mode, not to off. 177 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving When stopping the engine with the select lever in a position other than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) If the engine is stopped with the select lever in a position other than P, the push-button ignition switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to “ACC” mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off: Check that the parking brake is set. Shift the select lever to P. Check that the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) flashes slowly and then press the pushbutton ignition switch once. Check that the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) is off. ■Auto power off function Vehicles with an automatic transmission If the vehicle is left in “ACC” mode for more than 20 minutes or “ON” mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the select lever in P, the push-button ignition switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running. Vehicles with a manual transmission If the vehicle is left in “ACC” mode for more than 20 minutes or “ON” mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour, the push-button ignition switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 178 2-1. Driving procedures ■Operation of the push-button ignition switch If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the push-button ignition switch mode may not change or the engine may not start. ■Access key battery depletion →P. 35 ■Conditions affecting operation →P. 31 ■Note for the “keyless access” entry function →P. 32 ■If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 82) Contact your SUBARU dealer. ■Steering lock After turning the push-button ignition switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the push-button ignition switch again automatically cancels the steering lock. Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the select lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the select lever is displaced out of P. The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) will flash quickly. 179 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■When the steering lock cannot be released ■Steering lock motor overheating prevention To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning. ■If the keyless access with push button start indicator flashes in yellow and a message is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ■If the access key battery is depleted →P. 392 ■If the keyless access with push button start system has been deactivated in a customized setting →P. 477 The keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) will flash quickly and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 446) Vehicles with an automatic transmission Check that the select lever is set in P. Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right. Vehicles with a manual transmission Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right. 180 2-1. Driving procedures ■Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing the battery and so forth The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunction. WARNING ■When starting the engine ●Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●If the keyless access with push button start system indicator light flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering wheel is still locked, and it may result in an accident. ■Caution while driving If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■Stopping the engine Do not touch the push-button ignition switch during driving. When the push-button ignition switch is pressed for 2 seconds or longer or pressed 3 times successively, the engine will stop. When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal. The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident. 181 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge ●Do not leave the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode for long periods of time without the engine running. ●If the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) is illuminated, the push-button ignition switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the push-button ignition switch is off. ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not stop the engine when the select lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another select lever position, the push-button ignition switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to “ACC” mode. If the vehicle is left in “ACC” mode, battery discharge may occur. ■When starting the engine ●Do not race a cold engine. ●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the select lever while the starter is operating. ■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the push-button ignition switch If the push-button ignition switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. 182 2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) ■ Starting the engine Vehicles with an automatic transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the select lever is set in P. Firmly depress the brake pedal. Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine. Vehicles with a manual transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in neutral. Firmly depress the clutch pedal. Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine. ■ Changing the engine switch positions “LOCK” The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The key can be removed only when the select lever is in P.) “ACC” Some electrical components such as the power outlet can be used. “ON” All electrical components can be used. “START” For starting the engine. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 183 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK” Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the select lever to P. (→P. 185) Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to neutral. (→P. 192) ■If the engine does not start Remove the key and try again. If the engine does not start, the engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 82) Contact your SUBARU dealer. ■When the steering lock cannot be released ■Key reminder function A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key. ■Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing the battery and so forth The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunction. STEP 1 Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK” position. STEP 2 When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK” position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and right. 184 2-1. Driving procedures WARNING ■When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■Caution when driving Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may result if the engine is stopped while driving. CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods of time without the engine running. ■When starting the engine ●Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring system. If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and try to start the engine again after waiting for 10 seconds or more. ●Do not race a cold engine. ●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer immediately. ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the select lever while the starter is operating. 185 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving Automatic transmission∗ Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions. ■ Shifting the select lever Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the select lever with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting the select lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system While the push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode, move the select lever with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting the select lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped. ∗: If equipped 186 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Shift position uses *: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions. Setting the select lever to the D position is recommended for normal driving. Shift position Multi-information display Monochrome Function display Color display P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine R Reversing N Neutral D Normal D position driving* (gears between “1” and “6” are automatically selected) (paddle shift levers activated) (paddle shift levers activated) Temporary manual mode driving (→P. 190) M Manual mode driving (→P. 188) 187 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■ Selecting a driving mode By pressing the driving pattern selector switch the following modes can be selected to suit driving and usage conditions: Normal mode Sport mode The “SPORT” indicator comes on. Use sport mode for sporty driving or when driving in mountainous regions with lots of curves. Snow mode The “SNOW” indicator comes on. Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces such as snow. To cancel sport mode or snow mode, press the same side of the switch again. 188 2-1. Driving procedures Manual mode driving To enter manual mode, shift the select lever to the M position. While the upshift/downshift indicator light is illuminated, gears can be selected by operating the select lever or paddle shift levers, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing. Even if upshifting operations are performed, if vehicle speed is too low for the requested gear, the gear will not change. Upshift indicator Downshift indicator Upshifting (+) Downshifting (-) Each time the select lever or paddle shift levers are operated, the gear changes up or down one gear and the selected gear, “1” through “6”, will be set. The selected gear, from “1” to “6”, and “M” will be displayed on the shift position and shift range indicator. *1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display *2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display When in manual mode, the gear will not change unless the select lever or paddle shift levers are operated. *1 *2 189 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving However, even when in manual mode, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situations: ● When vehicle speed drops (downshift only). ● When engine oil temperature is high and engine speed rises close to the red zone. ■When moving the select lever out of P If the select lever is pushed sideways before the brake pedal is depressed, select lever operation may not be possible. Depress the brake pedal before shifting the select lever out of P. ■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer If downshifting operations are performed at a vehicle speed by which downshifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed to enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that downshifting cannot be performed. ■When driving with cruise control activated Downshifting can be performed even when using cruise control. After downshifting, the set speed continues. (→P. 188, 190) ■Sport mode ●In sport mode, lower gears are used and gears change at a higher engine speed. ●If sport mode is changed to while the select lever is in the M position, the “SPORT” indicator will come on but sport mode controls will not be carried out. Shift the select lever to the D position. ●Sport mode cannot be changed to when driving with cruise control activated. ■Snow mode To prevent slipping, 1st gear cannot be selected when in snow mode. ■Sport mode and snow mode automatic deactivation In the following situations, the driving mode is automatically deactivated: ●When the engine is turned off after driving in sport mode or snow mode. ●When cruise control is activated while driving in sport mode. 190 2-1. Driving procedures ■If the select lever cannot be shifted from P →P. 474 ■Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is on a slippery road, the transmission may automatically shift to 2nd gear for stopping and starting off. ■Temporary manual mode driving *1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display *2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display Temporary manual mode driving will be deactivated and normal D position driving will be returned to in the following situations: ●When driving for longer than the set time (the set time differs according to driving conditions). ●When the vehicle comes to a stop. ●When the accelerator pedal is continually depressed for longer than the set time. ●When the accelerator pedal is fully, or near-fully, depressed. Temporary manual mode driving can be changed to by operating the paddle shift levers while the select lever is in the D position. When this occurs, the selected gear and “D” are displayed on the shift position and shift range indicator. (When engine speed rises close to the red zone, upshifting will be automatically performed.) *1 *2 191 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving ■Adaptive control In order to realize smoother driving while driving in D position, an appropriate gear is automatically selected by limiting upshifting and performing downshifting operations according to driver operations and driving conditions. ●When driving uphill, prevents unnecessary upshifting and downshifting. ●When driving downhill, downshifting is performed at engine speeds higher than usual. ●When driving on curves, prevents upshifting even when accelerating. ●When the brake pedal is depressed firmly, downshifting is automatically performed, fully utilizing engine braking. ●When the accelerator pedal is suddenly released, prevents upshifting. Adaptive control operates automatically when the select lever is in the D position. (The function is canceled when the paddle shift levers are operated or the select lever is shifted to the M position.) WARNING ■When driving on slippery road surfaces Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning. ■To prevent incorrect operation Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift levers. Doing so may unintentionally move the paddle shift levers. 192 2-1. Driving procedures Manual Transmission∗ ∗: If equipped ■ Shifting the shift lever Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly. ■ Shifting the shift lever to R Shift the shift lever to R while lifting up the ring section. 193 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving Shift position indicator The selected shift position will be displayed on the multi-information display. The selected shift position will not appear in the following situations: • When the shift lever is in neutral. • When the vehicle speed is 6 mph (10 km/h) or less (except when the shift lever is in R). • When the clutch pedal is depressed. The default setting of the indicator is off. The indicator can be turned on/off. (→P. 214, 228) *1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display *2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display Shift-up indicator To help enable fuel-efficient driving, the shift-up indicator flashes 3 times to indicate upshift timing. The default setting of the indicator is off. The indicator can be turned on/off. (→P. 214, 228) *1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display *2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display *1 *2 *1 *2 194 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■To prevent damage to the transmission ●Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R. ●Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary and the clutch pedal is fully depressed. ●Do not shift the shift lever without depressing the clutch pedal. 195 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving Turn signal lever The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of the driver: Right turn Left turn Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it) The right hand signals will flash 3 times. Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it) The left hand signals will flash 3 times. 196 2-1. Driving procedures ■Turn signals can be operated when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode. ■If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out. ■If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed Operate the lever again. ■To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change Operate the lever in the opposite direction. ■Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer The lane change turn signal function can be disabled. (Customizable features: →P. 522) 197 2-1. Driving procedures 2 When driving Parking brake ■Usage in winter time →P. 277 CAUTION ■Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal. To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button. U.S.A. Canada and Mexico 198 2-1. Driving procedures Horn ■After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (→P. 67) To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark. 199 2 When driving 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters With monochrome display With color display 200 2-2. Instrument cluster Analog Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. Engine coolant temperature gauge (if equipped) Displays the engine coolant temperature. Digital Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Multi-information display, odometer and trip meter →P. 210, 218 “DISP” switch (if equipped) →P. 213 “ODO/TRIP” switch →P. 212, 219 “km/h MPH” switch Each time the switch is pressed, the display inside the meter changes between km/h and MPH. 201 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Brighter Darker ■The meters and display illuminate when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode. ■The brightness of the instrument panel lights When the front position lights or headlights are turned on, the instrument panel lights will be dimmed. However, if the surrounding area is bright, the brightness of the instrument panel lights will be set to maximum regardless of the position of the control dial (auto dimmer cancel function). In this case, the brightness of the instrument panel lights will not be able to be changed by the control dial. ■Fuel gauge ●When the indicator needle is close to “E”, promptly refuel the vehicle. ●The relationship between the indicator needle and the consumed amount (remaining fuel) is not always accurate. Only use it as a reference. ●When the vehicle is on an incline or curve, sudden acceleration and stops and so forth cause the fuel inside the tank to move which may cause the indicator needle to move up and down. ■Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer The sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel function can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 522) 202 2-2. Instrument cluster CAUTION ■To prevent damage to the engine and its components ●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed. ●In the following situations, the engine may be overheating. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 485) • Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone • Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or illuminates 203 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all indicators and warning lights illuminated. Instrument cluster (with monochrome display) Instrument cluster (with color display) 204 2-2. Instrument cluster Center panel 205 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ■ Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (→P. 195) Shift position indicator (→P. 193) (Vehicles with a manual transmission) Headlight high beam indicator (→P. 234) Shift-up indicator (→P. 193) (Vehicles with a manual transmission) (If equipped) Front fog light indicator (→P. 239) (Blue) (If equipped) Low engine coolant temperature indicator Security indicator (→P. 82, 87) Slip indicator (→P. 258) (If equipped) Keyless access with push button start system indicator light (→P. 172) Hill start assist ON indicator (→P. 264) Shift position and shift range indicator (→P. 186) Traction Control System OFF indicator light (→P. 258) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) Upshift/downshift indicator (→P. 188, 190) Vehicle stability control (VSC) off indicator (→P. 259) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) “SPORT” indicator (→P. 187) “TRACK” indicator (→P. 259) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) “SNOW” indicator (→P. 187) REV indicator (→P. 161) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) *2 *1, 3 *1 *1 206 2-2. Instrument cluster *1: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system These lights turn on when the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. *2: This indicator turns on when the engine coolant temperature is low. *3: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating. *4: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the indicator will illuminate. (Green) Cruise control indicator (→P. 243) (If equipped) Low outside temperature indicator (→P. 230) “SET” indicator (→P. 243) Airbag on-off indicator (→P. 131) *4 *5 207 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving *5: The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system), both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during the system check. After the system check, both the ON and OFF indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Then, either the ON or OFF indicator illuminates depending on the condition of the front passenger’s frontal airbag. When the OFF indicator remains off and ON indicator illuminates, the front passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. When the OFF indicator illuminates and ON indicator remains off, the front passenger’s frontal airbag does not deploy during a collision. If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators remain on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the pushbutton ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system), or the indicators remain off after the system check, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. 208 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (→P. 428, 440) *1: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system These lights, except those displayed on the multi-information display, turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for details. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system These lights, except those displayed on the multi-information display, turn on when the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for details. *2: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light flashes quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not been released. (Red) (If equipped) (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) (If equipped) (Yellow) (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) (If equipped) (If equipped) (Yellow) (for driver) (for the front passenger) (If equipped) (If equipped) *1 *1 *1 *4 *4 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *2 *3 *1 *1 *1 *5 *1 209 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving WARNING ■If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag system warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if this occurs. *3: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction. *4: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for details. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system These lights turn on when the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for details. *5: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display only: This light turns on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position to indicate that a system check is being performed. It will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the light does not come on or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for details. 210 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display (monochrome display) The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-information display can also be used to change the meter settings. ● Odometer ● Trip meter ● Outside temperature ● Current fuel consumption ● Average fuel consumption ● Setting screen for tachometer indicator needle movement function when starting the vehicle ● Setting screen for the shift position indicator and shiftup indicator (vehicles with a manual transmission) ● Setting screen for the REV indicator 211 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving Switch the display Pressing the “ODO/TRIP” switch or “DISP” switch displays the following information respectively: “ODO/TRIP” switch • Odometer • Trip meter • Setting screen for tachometer indicator needle movement function when starting the vehicle • Setting screen for the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator (vehicles with a manual transmission) “DISP” switch • Outside temperature • Current fuel consumption • Average fuel consumption • Setting screen for the REV indicator 212 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Changing the display using the “ODO/TRIP” switch Each time the “ODO/TRIP” switch is pressed, the display changes as follows. Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip meter*1 Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. Setting screen for tachometer indicator needle movement function when starting the vehicle*2 →P. 214 Setting screen for the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator* 2 (vehicles with a manual transmission) →P. 214 *1: Pressing and holding the “ODO/TRIP” switch will reset the trip meter that is currently displayed. *2: Only displayed when the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. 213 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ■ Changing the display using the “DISP” switch Each time the “DISP” switch is pressed, the display changes as follows. Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset. • The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed. • Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference. Setting screen for the REV indicator* →P. 215 *: Only displayed when the vehicle is stopped. 214 2-2. Instrument cluster Tachometer indicator needle movement function when starting the vehicle When the engine switch is turned to “ON” position, the tachometer indicator needle points to the highest value once and then quickly returns. ■ Changing between activated/deactivated Press the “ODO/TRIP” switch repeatedly until the setting screen is displayed. (→P. 212) Each time the switch is pressed and held, the function changes between activated/deactivated. “S-on”: Activated “S-oFF”: Deactivated Setting the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator (vehicles with a manual transmission) Displaying of the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator can be turned on/off. Press the “ODO/TRIP” switch repeatedly until the setting screen is displayed. (→P. 212) Each time the switch is pressed and held, the display changes between on/off. “G-on”: Display on “G-oFF”: Display off STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1 STEP 2 215 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving Setting the REV indicator ■ Changing the REV indicator settings The engine speed at which the REV indicator turns on at and whether a buzzer sounds or not when the light turns on can be set. Engine speed setting range: From 2000 to 7400 rpm (r/min) Press the “DISP” switch repeatedly until the setting screen is displayed. (→P. 213) Press and hold the “DISP” switch. “REV.” and the thousandth place flash. After flashing, the number changes each time the button is pressed and held. Press the “DISP” switch. The hundredth place flashes. After flashing, the number changes each time the button is pressed and held. Press the “DISP” switch. A buzzer sounds once, and setting of the engine speed value is complete. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 216 2-2. Instrument cluster Press and hold the “DISP” switch. Each time the “DISP” switch is pressed and held, the buzzer changes between activated and deactivated. “b-on”: Buzzer activated “b-oFF”: Buzzer deactivated When the setting changes from “b-oFF” to “b-on”, the buzzer sounds 3 times. Press the “DISP” switch. When the buzzer sounds, all settings have been completed. The settings are displayed. ■ Deactivating the REV indicator settings After setting the thousandth place to “-”, press the “DISP” switch once. STEP 5 STEP 6 217 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ■Outside temperature display ●In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed. • When the vehicle is very hot, such as when under the sun. • When the vehicle is idling or being driven at low speeds such as in a traffic jam or when the engine is stopped and then restarted immediately afterward. • When the actual outside temperature is outside of the indicator range. ●If “− −” is displayed for approximately 1 minute or more or if the outside temperature is not displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new shift position number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury. 218 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display (color display) Summary of functions The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving- related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multiinformation display can also be used to change the meter settings. Meter control switches (→P. 219) “ODO/TRIP” switch (→P. 219) Menu icons (→P. 220) The menu icon bar will be displayed momentarily when the meter control switch is used to change the displayed content. Content display area A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Additionally, a warning message will be displayed in some situations. • Menu icon content (→P. 220) • Warning message (→P. 229, 440) Odometer/trip meter display area (→P. 230) Displays the following items: • Odometer/trip meter • Outside temperature 219 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving Using the multi-information display ■ Using the content display area The content display area is operated using the meter control switches. : Select menu icons : Change displayed content, scroll up/ down the screen and move the cursor : Enter : Return to the previous screen For information pertaining to the content of each menu icon, refer to the explanation of each item under the heading of the relevant menu icon. ■ Using the odometer/trip meter display area Items in this area are operated using the “ODO/TRIP” switch. Press: Change displayed item Each time the switch is pressed, the displayed item changes in the order of odometer → trip meter A → trip meter B. Press and hold: Reset Display the desired trip meter and press and hold the switch to reset the trip meter. 220 2-2. Instrument cluster Menu icons Select a menu icon to display its content. Drive information (→P. 221) Select to display various drive data. Exclusive content for BRZ (→P. 224) Select to display the G-force display, stopwatch, and other useful functions for sporty driving. Settings display (→P. 228) Select to change the meter display settings. Warning message display (→P. 229, 440) Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected. 221 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving Drive information ( ) ■ Drive information (page 1) Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset. Driving range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. ● Pressing and holding will reset the average fuel consumption. ● Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference. ● This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. ● When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. When refueling, turn the push-button ignition switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the push-button ignition switch off, the display may not be updated. 222 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Drive information (page 2) Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since display was reset. Driving time Displays the cumulative time the vehicle has been driven since display was reset. Driving distance Displays the cumulative distance the vehicle has been driven since display was reset. ● Pressing and holding will reset the average vehicle speed/ driving time/driving distance. 223 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ■ Drive information (page 3) Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge needle/indicator enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed. Engine oil temperature gauge Displays the engine oil temperature. Voltmeter Displays the charging voltage. As voltage displayed may be different from the actual battery voltage, use the voltmeter as a guideline. ● Pressing and holding will turn the range value display on the engine coolant temperature gauge display on/off. 224 2-2. Instrument cluster Exclusive content for BRZ ( ) ■ G-force Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure Record of the maximum Gforces Accelerator pedal input Brake fluid pressure Steering amount If the steering wheel is turned completely to the left or right, the bottom side of the gauge on the corresponding side will be illuminated in red. This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle. ● Resetting the record of maximum G-forces Press and hold to reset the record. ● Changing the acceleration G-force display range Press and hold to change the range of the acceleration Gforce display between 1.0 G and 0.5 G. ● Screen displayed while driving While driving, the G-force screen will automatically be changed to the power and torque curve display. To display the G-force screen, stop the vehicle in a safe place. 225 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ■ Power and torque curve Power output Torque Current engine speed The vertical bar will slide laterally according to the current engine speed. This chart is intended for reference only and does not show the actual engine torque or output. 226 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Stopwatch Measures and displays current lap time and previous lap times Fastest lap time (top screen) When the timer is reset, “− −’− −”− −” will be displayed. Fastest lap time (measurement screen) Current lap time Total lap time Past lap times Records of the 50 most recent lap times will be displayed. Meter control switch operation guide ● Changing between the stopwatch screens To change to the measurement screen: Press . To change to the top screen: Press . Top screen Measurement screen 227 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ● Operating the measurement screen : Start/stop measurement : Mark off one lap : Reset measured lap times : Scroll through the lap times ● Resetting measured lap times After stopping the measurement, press . ● To display other content while the stopwatch is operating If the measurement screen is displayed, press to display the top screen. Then operate the meter control switches to display other content. While other items are displayed, the measurement will continue but the stopwatch cannot be operated. 228 2-2. Instrument cluster Settings display ( ) Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change settings. Press or to select . Operate the switches to select a desired item. Press / or / to change the setting and then press to confirm the change. Item Settings Details Welcome screen On Select to enable/disable the welcome screen and tachometer indicator needle movement function when the pushbutton ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode. Off REV. RPM –00 rpm (OFF) ~ 7400 rpm Select to enable/disable the REV indicator and set the engine speed at which the REV indicator will be illuminated. To disable, select “–” for the engine speed (–00 rpm) Selectable engine speed range: 2000 to 7400 rpm Buzzer On Select to enable/disable the sounding of a buzzer when the REV indicator is illuminated. This setting can be changed only when the REV indicator is enabled. Off GSI (vehicles with a manual transmission) On Select to enable/disable the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator. Off (→P. 193) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 229 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving *: If equipped Warning message ( ) Select to display warning messages related to situations such as a vehicle malfunction. ● If there is more than one message to be displayed, press / to change the display. ● If there are no warning messages to be displayed, a message indicating so will be displayed. Language English Select to change the language displayed. French Spanish Russian* Chinese* Units km, km/h, km/l Select to change the units of measure displayed. km, km/h, l/100km miles, MPH, MPG Initialization Yes Select to reset the meter display set- No tings to the default setting. Item Settings Details 230 2-2. Instrument cluster Odometer/trip meter display area ■ Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. ■ Trip meter A/trip meter B Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently. To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the “ODO/ TRIP” switch. ■ Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower. 231 2-2. Instrument cluster 2 When driving ■G-force display ●Depending on the vehicle usage conditions, the brake fluid pressure display may not reach its maximum reading even though the brake pedal is fully depressed. ●If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the steering amount display may be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled. ■Suspension of the settings display ●The settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place. ●If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended. ■Using the stopwatch If the engine is stopped while the stopwatch is operating, the stopwatch will stop and the time up to that point will be recorded. ■Outside temperature display ●In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed. • When the vehicle is very hot, such as when under the sun. • When the vehicle is idling or being driven at low speeds such as in a traffic jam or when the engine is stopped and then restarted immediately afterward. • When the actual outside temperature is outside of the indicator range. ●If “− −” is displayed for approximately 1 minute or more or if the outside temperature is not displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display. 232 2-2. Instrument cluster WARNING ■Caution for use while driving ●When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle. ●Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle. ■The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury. ■Cautions during setting up the display As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. CAUTION ■While setting up the display To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features. 233 2 When driving 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows: Off The daytime running lights turn on. (→P. 235) The headlights, parking/ daytime running lights (→P. 235) and so on turn on and off automatically. (Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: When the engine switch is in the “ON” position Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: When the push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode) The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all the lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. 234 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Turning on the high beam headlights With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams. The high beam indicator will illuminate when the high beams are turned on. Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off. Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once. The high beam indicator will illuminate when the high beams are flashed. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. 235 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers 2 When driving ■Daytime running light system ●The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights. ●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.) • The engine is running • The select lever is shifted out of P (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) • The parking brake is released • The headlight switch is off or in the “AUTO”* position *: When the surroundings are bright The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate even if the parking brake is set again. ●When the turn signal indicators are flashing, the daytime running light on the side that the turn signals are flashing will turn off. ●When the hazard warning flashers are flashing, both daytime running lights will turn off. ●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy. ■Headlight control sensor Headlight control sensor is located on the passenger’s side. The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. 236 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■Welcome lighting system When entering the vehicle When the headlight switch is in and the doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system, the headlights, front position lights, etc. will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds. The lights are turned off in the following situations. ●The engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. (Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) ●The push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode. (Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ●The doors are locked. When exiting the vehicle Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The light switch is in , the headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the key is removed from the engine switch. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.) To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or turn the lights off and then back to or . Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: The light switch is in , the headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened and closed if the push-button ignition switch is turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed or the door lock sensor on the door handle is touched after all the doors are locked.) To turn the lights on again, turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode, or turn the light switch off and then back to or . ■Light reminder buzzer Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position and the driver’s door is opened with the key removed from the engine switch while the lights are turned on. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system A buzzer sounds when the push-button ignition switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on. 237 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers 2 When driving ■Automatic headlight leveling system The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ■Windshield wiper-linked automatic headlights When the headlight switch is in , if the windshield wipers operate for approximately 10 seconds, the headlights will turn on automatically. (If the windshield wipers are operated due to operation of the windshield washers, the headlights will not turn on automatically.) In this case, the headlights will automatically turn off approximately 60 seconds after the windshield wipers stop operating. ■Battery-saving function In the following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged: ●The headlights and/or tail lights are on. ●The key is removed from the engine switch (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch is turned off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). ●The light switch is in , or . This function will be canceled in any of the following situations: ●When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ●When the light switch is operated ●When the door is opened or closed ■Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 522) 238 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 239 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers 2 When driving Fog light switch∗ ■Fog lights can be used when The headlights are on in low beam. The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog. Turns the front fog lights off Turns the front fog lights on ∗: If equipped 240 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers and washer When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted. The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows. Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency 241 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers 2 When driving ■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode. ■If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid tank. WARNING ■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Washer/wiper dual operation The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts. 242 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers CAUTION ■When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. ■When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat. ■When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged. ■When adding washer fluid Do not use strong cleaning agents as windshield washer fluid. 243 2 When driving 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal. Indicators Cruise control switch ■ Setting the vehicle speed Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control. Cruise control indicator (green) will come on. Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control. Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed. “SET” indicator will come on. The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed. STEP 1 STEP 2 244 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained. Increases the speed Decreases the speed Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction. Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction. The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows: Fine adjustment (U.S.A.): By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated. Fine adjustment (Canada and Mexico): By approximately 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the lever is operated. Large adjustment: The vehicle speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released. Then, release the lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed. 245 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving ■Cruise control can be set when Vehicles with an automatic transmission ●The select lever is in D or M and the vehicle is in the 2nd gear or higher. ●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Vehicles with a manual transmission ●The vehicle is in the 2nd gear or higher. ●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). ■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control. The speed setting is also canceled when: • The brakes are applied. • The clutch pedal is depressed (manual transmission only). Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control. Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). 246 2-4. Using other driving systems ■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed ●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. ●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed. ■Automatic cruise control cancelation Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations. ●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). ●Vehicle stability control (VSC) is activated. ■The system may be malfunctioning when In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ●The cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow. ●The cruise control indicator does not come on even when the “ON-OFF” button is pressed while the engine is running. 247 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving WARNING ■When using the cruise control Always set the speed appropriately according to the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, and other conditions. ■Cruise control precaution (vehicles with an automatic transmission) You can cancel the cruise control by shifting the select lever into the N position. However, do not shift the lever into the N position while driving except in case of emergency. If the select lever is shifted into the N position, the engine brake will no longer work. This could result in an accident. ■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use. ■Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●In heavy traffic ●On roads with sharp bends ●On winding roads ●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ●On steep hills Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. ●During emergency towing 248 2-4. Using other driving systems Rear view camera The rear view camera is installed to the trunk lid and displays a rear view image on the audio/navigation monitor when the engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) and the select lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever (vehicles with a manual transmission) is set to “R”. 249 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving How to use the rear view camera Perform the following to display a rear view image on the rear view camera. Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). Shift the select lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever (vehicles with a manual transmission) to “R”. In the following situations, the screen will return to the image that was displayed before the lever was shifted to “R”. • Vehicles with an automatic transmission: When several seconds have passed since the select lever was shifted to a position other than “P” or “R” (off delay function). • Vehicles with an automatic transmission: When the select lever is shifted to “P”. • Vehicles with a manual transmission: When several seconds have passed since the shift lever was shifted to a position other than “R” (off delay function). • When the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. STEP 1 STEP 2 250 2-4. Using other driving systems Displayed area ■ Displayed area on the screen ● The area behind the rear bumper can be displayed. Areas on both the left and right side of the rear bumper and areas just under the rear bumper cannot be displayed. ● The distance of the image displayed on the screen will look shorter than the actual distance. ● Areas above where the rear view camera is installed cannot be displayed. ● If there is an object behind the vehicle with a long protrusion on its upper part, such as a sign pole, the protruding part will not be displayed on the screen. 251 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving ■ Distance from the ground on the screen The distance markers show the distance from an object on level ground when the vehicle is unloaded. Depending on the loading condition and road condition, the distance shown on the screen may be different from the actual distance. When there is an upward slope behind the vehicle “A”: 3 ft. (1 m) The distance on the screen will look farther than the actual distance. When there is a downward slope behind the vehicle “A”: 3 ft. (1 m) The distance on the screen will look closer than the actual distance. ■ Distance markers 3 ft. (1 m) line 10 ft. (3 m) line The distance markers show the distance from points on the road. If there is a car or other object close to the rear of the vehicle, the distance will not be displayed correctly. 252 2-4. Using other driving systems Help lines The help lines (distance markers and vehicle width lines) are a guide to help you realize the actual distance of points on the screen. Vehicle width lines (oblique vertical lines) Approximately 10 ft. (3 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line) Approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line) Approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizontal line) Vehicle centerline When the select lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever (vehicles with a manual transmission) is shifted to “R”, the screen will display the help lines together with the rear view image. 253 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving ■Rear view camera display ●On vehicles with a genuine SUBARU navigation system, the rear view camera display will be prioritized over other displays. To display another display, shift the select lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever (vehicles with a manual transmission) to a position other than “R”. ●Images from the rear view camera will be displayed horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle’s rear view mirror or a side view mirror. ●Images on the screen may look different depending on the number of passengers and loading conditions. ●When the vehicle is on an incline or decline, distances displayed on the screen may look different than the actual distance. ●When the vehicle is loaded, the distance on the screen will look farther than the actual distance, as is the case when approaching an upward incline. ●The color of objects on the screen may be different from the actual color of the objects. ●Be sure to check your surroundings when “Check Surroundings Before Backing Up” is displayed. ●If you shift to “R” shortly after turning the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system), “Check Surroundings Before Backing Up” may not be displayed. Wait several seconds or more after turning the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) before shifting to the “R” range. The warning message can then be displayed. 254 2-4. Using other driving systems ●Strong light shined on the rear view camera lens may develop white light stripes around the light source. This is not a malfunction. ●Under fluorescent lighting, the display may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction. ●It may be difficult to see the image from the rear view camera in the following situations. This is not a malfunction. • When the vehicle is in a dark area (at night, in a tunnel, etc.). • When the vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place. • When foreign matter (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the view of the rear view camera is stuck to the lens of the rear view camera. • When strong lights shine directly into the camera lens (in this case, vertical lines may be displayed on the screen). ■Taking care of the rear view camera ●Do not clean the rear view camera with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the rear view camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. ●When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply wax to the rear view camera. If wax contacts the rear view camera, remove it with a clean cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent. ●The camera lens has hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens as the displayed image may be adversely affected. 255 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving WARNING ■When using the rear view camera ●Since the rear view camera uses a wide-angle lens, the image on the screen will be different from the actual view in terms of distance. ●Since the range of the image displayed on the screen is limited, you should always check the area behind the vehicle and the surrounding area with your eyes and mirrors, and move backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rear view image from the rear view camera could lead to an accident. ●Do not disassemble or modify the rear view camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes from any of the parts or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rear view camera immediately. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric shock. ●Do not expose the rear view camera or wiring to an open flame as damage or a fire may occur. ●Do not use the system if the trunk is open. 256 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■How to use the rear view camera ●When washing your vehicle with a high-pressure washer, do not allow the water to contact the rear view camera directly. Entry of water into the camera lens may result in condensation on the lens, malfunction, fire or electric shock. ●Since the rear view camera is a precision device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, fire or electric shock may occur. ●If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen on the rear view camera, very carefully remove it. Otherwise, damage to the rear view camera may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the rear view camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. ●When replacing a fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the specified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction. ●If the rear view camera is used for a long time while the engine is not running, the battery may become completely discharged. 257 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. ■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface ■ Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation ■ Vehicle stability control (VSC) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces ■ TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. The TRAC system is also equipped with the brake LSD function. ■ Hill start assist →P. 264 ■ Electric power steering Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel 258 2-4. Using other driving systems When the TRAC/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are operating The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC (brake LSD function)/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are operating. Disabling the TRAC system If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. In this case, the brake LSD function remains on. To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the button. The Traction Control System OFF indicator light will come on. Press the button again to turn the system back on. 259 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving “TRACK” mode Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accommodate various driving preferences. The control modes can be selected with the “TRACK” switch. Normal mode allows secure and smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed and held for 1 second or more, “TRACK” mode is activated. Control characteristics such as the Vehicle stability control (VSC) and TRAC are adjusted to afford maneuverability closer to what a driver may desire, while a sense of security is retained. “TRACK” mode/Normal mode The “TRACK” indicator and Vehicle stability control (VSC) off indicator come on when in “TRACK” mode. To change back to normal mode while in “TRACK” mode, press or the “TRACK” switch. Turning off both TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems To turn the TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped. The Traction Control System OFF indicator light and the Vehicle stability control (VSC) off indicator light will come on. However, on vehicles with an automatic transmission, the brake LSD function will remain on. Press the button again to turn the systems back on. 260 2-4. Using other driving systems Selecting TRAC mode and Vehicle stability control (VSC) mode Modes can be selected to suit your driving conditions as follows: *1: Vehicles with an automatic transmission *2: Vehicles with a manual transmission Driving conditions TRAC modes Vehicle stability control (VSC) modes Brake LSD function Indicator lights Normal roads Normal mode Normal mode Normal mode  Rough roads Off Normal mode Normal mode Sport driving “TRACK” mode “TRACK” mode “TRACK” mode Off Off “TRACK” mode*1 Off*2 261 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving ■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems After turning the TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems off, the systems will be automatically reactivated in the following situations: ●Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: When the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position ●Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: When the push-button ignition switch is turned off ●If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed is more than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h). If both the TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are turned off, automatic reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases. ■Automatic deactivation of “TRACK” mode Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system When the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position after driving in “TRACK” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system When the push-button ignition switch is turned off after driving in “TRACK” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated. ■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems ●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. • A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. • The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. • The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. 262 2-4. Using other driving systems ■Electric power steering operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction. ■Reduced effectiveness of the electric power steering system The effectiveness of the electric power steering system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The electric power steering system should return to normal after a little while. WARNING ■The ABS does not operate effectively when ●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road). ●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads. ■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations: ●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ●When driving with tire chains ●When driving over bumps in the road ●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces 263 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving WARNING ■TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. ■When the Vehicle stability control (VSC) and/or brake LSD function is activated The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes. ■When the TRAC/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are turned off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems off unless necessary. ■Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your SUBARU dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■Handling of tires and suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction. 264 2-4. Using other driving systems Hill start assist The hill start assist system helps to maintain braking force to assist starting off forward while facing uphill or starting off backward while facing downhill. As the hill start assist system is initially disabled, enable the system to make it operable. The enabled/disabled setting will be maintained the next time the engine is started. When the system is enabled, the hill start assist ON indicator will be illuminated. ■ Enabling the hill start assist system Park your vehicle in a flat, safe location. Make sure that the parking brake is securely engaged. Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or turning the push-button ignition switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). Start the engine and check that the ABS warning light and slip indicator are off. Press and hold for approximately 30 seconds. Check that both the Vehicle stability control (VSC) off indicator and Traction Control System OFF indicator illuminate and then turn off. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 265 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving Within 5 seconds after the indicator lights turn off, release . Then, press the switch again within 2 seconds of releasing it. The hill start assist ON indicator will illuminate and then turn off. Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or turn the push-button ignition switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system). Then, restart the engine and check that the hill start assist ON indicator is illuminated. The hill start assist system is enabled when the indicator is illuminated. To disable the hill start assist system, perform the above through again. STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 1 STEP 6 266 2-4. Using other driving systems ■When enabling the hill start assist system ●If the hill start assist ON indicator does not illuminate or if an incorrect operation is performed, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or turn the push-button ignition switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) and then restart the enabling procedure from . ●If is pressed and held for approximately 30 seconds or more, the Vehicle stability control (VSC) off indicator and Traction Control System OFF indicator will turn off and subsequent operations of the switch will be rejected. In this case, the Vehicle stability control (VSC) system will operate in normal mode. (→P. 260) To enable , turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or turn the push-button ignition switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) and then restart the engine. ■Operating conditions of the hill start assist system When the following conditions are met, the hill start assist system will operate: ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The select lever is in D or M (when starting off forward on while facing uphill) or in R (when starting off backward while facing downhill). ●Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in a position other than R (when starting off forward while facing uphill) or in R (when starting off backward while facing downhill). ●The vehicle is stopped. ●The accelerator pedal is not depressed. ●The parking brake is not engaged. STEP 4 267 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving ■The hill start assist system will not operate when The hill start assist system will not operate when any of the following conditions are met: ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The select lever is in a position other than D or M (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill). ●Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in R (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill). ●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The accelerator pedal is depressed. ●The parking brake is applied. ●Vehicles with a manual transmission: The clutch is engaged. ●Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the brake pedal was released. ●The hill start assist ON indicator is not illuminated. ●Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: The engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. ●Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: The pushbutton ignition switch is turned to “ACC” mode or turned off. ■Notes for the hill start assist system ●A slight jolt may be felt when starting off backward with the select lever in R (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or the shift lever in R (vehicles with a manual transmission) and then moving forward. ●If the braking power of the hill start assist system is insufficient, depress the brake pedal. ●While the vehicle is stopped, make sure to depress the brake pedal. ■The system may be malfunctioning when In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ●The slip indicator is illuminated. ●The hill start assist ON indicator turns off and a buzzer sounds. 268 2-4. Using other driving systems WARNING ■Hill start assist system precautions ●Do not overly rely on the hill start assist system. The hill start assist system may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice. ●Unlike the parking brake, the hill start assist system is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use the hill start assist system to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident. ●Do not stop the engine while the hill start assist system is operating, as the hill start assist system will stop operating, possibly leading to an accident. 269 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving Rear wing∗ Adjusting the angle of the rear wing ■ Before adjusting the angle of the rear wing ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the shift lever to N. ● Stop the engine. ■ Necessary tools ● TORX wrench (T30) ● Wrench, socket wrench and socket, or a similar tool (diameter 10 mm) On initial delivery, the rear wing is adjusted to an angle at which both stability at high speeds and enhanced handling can be attained. The rear wing can be adjusted to 2 different angles. ∗: If equipped 270 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Adjusting the angle of the rear wing While holding the bolt on the rear side with a TORX wrench, using a wrench, socket wrench and socket, or similar tool, remove the nut and washers. Remove the bolt and washers. Adjust the angle of the rear wing. Standard (initial delivery) position High downforce position We recommend position for attaining both stability at high speeds and enhanced handling. Install the bolt and washers. While holding the bolt with a TORX wrench, install the washers and nut and tighten the nut using a wrench, socket wrench and socket, or similar tool. Tightening torque: 2.2 ft•lbf (3 N•m, 0.3 kgf•m) Front of vehicle STEP 1 STEP 2 Front of vehicle STEP 3 STEP 4 Front of vehicle 271 2-4. Using other driving systems 2 When driving ■CFRP (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic) parts ●Due to the properties of the carbon fiber used in CFRP parts, the shade and density of the carbon fiber weave may vary. ●Cleaning and protecting the CFRP parts: →P. 337, 338 WARNING ■After adjusting the angle of the rear wing Make sure that the bolts and nuts are tightened securely. If they are not, the rear wing may come off while driving, possibly leading to an accident. CAUTION ■Handling of the rear wing ●Do not push or pull the rear wing with excessive force. Doing so may damage the rear wing. ●When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to leave any residual wax between the wing and wing end-plates. ■When adjusting the angle of the rear wing Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the rear wing may be damaged. ●Make sure to loosen the rear nuts and bolts before adjusting the angle of the rear wing. ●When installing the rear bolts, make sure that both the left and right bolts are installed to the same position for the desired angle. ●Do not loosen the nuts and bolts on the front side. 272 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) (5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load: ● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. ● Be sure all items are secured in place. ● To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage evenly within the luggage compartment. ● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. 273 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving (6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P. 492) SUBARU does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. Example on your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 699 lb. (317 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows: 699 lb. – 366 lb. = 333 lb. (317 kg -166 kg = 151 kg) In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of 258 lb. (117 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows: 333 lb. – 258 lb. = 75 lb. (151 kg – 117 kg = 34 kg) As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. 274 2-5. Driving information WARNING ■Things that must not be carried in the trunk The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk: ●Receptacles containing gasoline ●Aerosol cans ■Storage precautions Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. ●To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible. ●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats. ●Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seatbelts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. ●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident: • At the feet of the driver • On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) • On the rear shelf • On the instrument panel • On the dashboard ●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. 275 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving WARNING ■Capacity and distribution ●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. 276 2-5. Driving information Vehicle load limits ■Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 382) WARNING ■Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. ■ Total load capacity Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. ■ Seating capacity Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. ■ Towing capacity SUBARU does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. ■ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. 277 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. ■ Pre-winter preparations ● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • Engine oil • Washer fluid ● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery. ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires. Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires are the same for the following items: • Size • Circumference • Speed symbol • Load index • Construction • Manufacturer • Brand (tread pattern) • Degrees of wear Also, make sure to use tire chains that match the size of the tires. ■ Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions. ● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. 278 2-5. Driving information ● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes. ● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle. ● If a door is opened and closed when its side window is frozen, the window safety device will operate and the side window open/close function linked to door operation may not operate correctly. If this occurs, perform the following after the ice has melted. Open the side window until it is approximately halfway open with the door closed. Fully close the window by pulling the switch up to the onetouch closing position and continue holding the switch for 1 second or more after the window fully closes. The window position is reset and the safety device operations will be released. ■ When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. ■ When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold latitudes) Park the vehicle and move the select lever to P (automatic transmission) or shift lever to 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping. STEP 1 STEP 2 279 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving Tire chains Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body. When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer’s instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty. Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class “S” device, and use it on the rear wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence because you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident. Selecting tire chains We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer for information about the chains that you can use. 280 2-5. Driving information ■Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty. WARNING ■Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ●Use tires of the specified size, and that are the same for the following items: • Size • Circumference • Speed symbol • Load index • Construction • Manufacturer • Brand (tread pattern) • Degrees of wear ●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. ●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. 281 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving CAUTION ■Repairing or replacing snow tires (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from SUBARU dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ■Fitting tire chains (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted. 282 2-5. Driving information Trailer towing Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle. SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that may result from trailer towing, from any trailer towing equipment or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. 283 2-5. Driving information 2 When driving Dinghy towing Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed behind a motor home or other vehicle with the wheels (2 or 4) on the ground. Serious damage can result. 284 2-5. Driving information Interior features 3 285 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Manual air conditioning system . 286 Automatic air conditioning system . 293 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers. 302 3-2. Using the audio system AUX port/USB port. 304 Using the microphone 305 3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights list . 306 • Interior light 307 3-4. Using the storage features List of storage features 308 • Glove box. 309 • Bottle holders. 310 • Cup holders/ console tray . 311 3-5. Other interior features Sun visors 313 Vanity mirrors. 314 Clock 315 Power outlets . 316 Seat heaters. 318 Floor mat 320 HomeLink®. 322 Compass 333 286 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Manual air conditioning system∗ Adjusting the settings To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease). Turning the dial to “0” turns off the fan. To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool). is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air. To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selection dial to the desired position. The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be selected for more delicate adjustment. ∗: If equipped Fan speed control dial Air outlet selection dial Air conditioning on/off button Temperature control dial Outside air or recirculated air mode STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 287 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features Defogging the windshield Set the air outlet selection dial to position. The air intake is automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is on. Perform the following operations accordingly: ● To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial. ● To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial. ● If the dehumidification function is not operating, press to operate the dehumidification function. To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up. STEP 1 STEP 2 288 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Air outlets and air flow Air flows to the upper body. Air flows to the upper body and feet. Air flows to the feet. Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates. The air intake is automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recirculated air mode when the switch is on. 289 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes Press . The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed. Adjusting the position of the air outlets Center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Right and left side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. When defrosting the side windows, face the right and left side outlets toward them. 290 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Opening and closing the air outlets Center outlets Open the air outlet. Close the air outlet. Right and left side outlets Open the vent. Close the vent. 291 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features ■For quick cooling Turn the temperature control dial to the “MAX A/C” position and select the recirculated air mode. ■Fogging up of the windows ●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. ●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily. ●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. ■Outside/recirculated air mode When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/ recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively. ■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed. ■Ventilation and air conditioning odors ●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode. ●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ●To reduce potential odors from occurring: It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. ■Air conditioning filter →P. 389 292 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger WARNING ■To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 293 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features Automatic air conditioning system∗ Air outlets, fan speed, air inlet control and the air conditioner compressor are automatically operated. *1: For the driver’s side *2: For the front passenger’s side Windshield defogger Temperature control dial*1 Outside air or recirculated air mode Temperature setting display*1 Automatic Off mode Dual operation button Changes the air outlets used Air conditioning on/off button Temperature control dial*2 Temperature setting display*2 Fan speed control dial Fan speed/Air outlet display ∗: If equipped 294 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Using the automatic air conditioning system Press . The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets, fan speed, air inlet control and the air conditioner compressor are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. Turn temperature control dial clockwise to increase the temperature and turn temperature control dial counterclockwise to decrease the temperature on the driver’s side. When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. ■ Automatic mode indicators If the , , or button or the fan speed control dial is operated, the “FULL” indicator will go off, however, automatic mode for functions other than the one which was operated will be maintained and the “AUTO” indicator will remain on. If the , , and buttons and the fan speed control dial are all operated, automatic mode will be disabled and the “AUTO” indicator will go off. STEP 1 STEP 2 295 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features Adjusting the settings manually To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counter-clock wise (decrease). Press to turn the fan off. To adjust the temperature settings, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-clock wise (cool). To adjust the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool) on the passenger side to separately adjust the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press (the indicator on turns off) to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous mode). The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed. To change the air outlets, press . The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button is pressed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 296 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Defogging the windshield Press . The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.) To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is defogged. 297 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features Air outlets and air flow Air flows to the upper body. Air flows to the upper body and feet. Air flows to the feet. Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates. If the recirculated air mode is used, it may automatically switch to the outside air mode. 298 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Switching between outside air mode and recirculated air mode Press . The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed. Adjusting the position of the air outlets Center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. Right and left side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down. When defrosting the side windows, face the right and left side outlets toward them. 299 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features Opening and closing the air outlets Center outlets Open the air outlet. Close the air outlet. Right and left side outlets Open the vent. Close the vent. 300 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed. ■Fogging up of the windows ●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively. ●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily. ●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. ■Outside/recirculated air mode ●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively. ●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature. ■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed. 301 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features ■Ventilation and air conditioning odors ●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode. ●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents. ●To reduce potential odors from occurring: • It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off. • The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode. ■Air conditioning filter →P. 389 WARNING ■To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 302 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The outside rear view mirror defoggers* are used to remove frost, dew or raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors. Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system On/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system On/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. *: Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers 303 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger 3 Interior features ■The defoggers can be operated when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode. ■The outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on. ■When continuous operation is set (vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system) During continuous operation, the defogger stops operating for 2 minutes after every 15 minutes of continual operation. Even during the 2 minutes that operation stops, the operating light remains illuminated. The rear window defogger will continue to operate in this cycle until it is turned off. ■Customization that can be configured at SUBARU dealer (vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system) The rear window defogger can be set to 15-minute operation or continuous operation. (Customizable features →P. 522) WARNING ■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very hot and burn you. CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 304 3-2. Using the audio system AUX port∗/USB port ■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system A portable audio device connected to the audio system can be operated using the vehicle’s audio controls. However, if the device is connected using the port, operations other than adjustments to the volume and sound quality must be performed on the portable audio device itself. ■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the battery power source of the portable audio device to reduce noise. ∗: If equipped This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. For more information, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation system or audio system. Open the cover and connect Type A Type B the portable audio device. 305 3-2. Using the audio system 3 Interior features Using the microphone The microphone can be used for the voice command in the Bluetooth® audio system or the hands-free phone system. 306 3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights list Interior light (→P. 307) Engine switch light (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) Push-button ignition switch light (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Door courtesy lights (if equipped) 307 3-3. Using the interior lights 3 Interior features Interior light Turns the light off Turns light on when door is open Turns the light on ■Illuminated entry system Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/ closed. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The lights automatically turn on/off according to push-button ignition switch mode, the presence of the access key, whether the doors are locked/ unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed. ■To prevent battery discharge If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes: ●Interior light (when the switch is in the “DOOR” position) ●Engine switch light (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) ●Push-button ignition switch light (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ●Door courtesy lights (if equipped) ■Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 522) Interior light 308 3-4. Using the storage features List of storage features WARNING ■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: ●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. ●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard. Glove box Bottle holders Cup holders/console tray 309 3-4. Using the storage features 3 Interior features Glove box Pull up the lever to open the glove box. WARNING ■Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside. Glove box 310 3-4. Using the storage features Bottle holders ■When using the bottle holder ●When storing a bottle, close the cap. ●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape. WARNING ■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder Do not place anything other than a PET bottle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. CAUTION ■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break. Bottle holders 311 3-4. Using the storage features 3 Interior features Cup holders/console tray ■Changing the cup holder position ■Changing the console tray size Remove the cup holder and change the holder position. Remove the cup holder. Cup holders/console tray 312 3-4. Using the storage features WARNING ■Caution while driving Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●Before driving, place the cup holder in the rear position so that it does not hinder select lever or shift lever operation. ■Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ●When placing the cup holder, make sure it is facing the correct direction. Failure to do so will cause the cup holder to not be secure in the console tray and hinder select lever or shift lever operation. Cup holders/console tray 313 3 Interior features 3-5. Other interior features Sun visors To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down. To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side. 314 3-5. Other interior features Vanity mirrors CAUTION ■To prevent battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights) Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off. Open the cover to use. Vehicles with vanity lights: The light turns on when the cover is opened. 315 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features Clock ■The clock is displayed when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode. ■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals The clock data will be reset. The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons. Adjusts the hours Adjusts the minutes Rounds to the nearest hour* *: e.g.1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00 00 316 3-5. Other interior features Power outlets The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on 10 A or less. In the console tray In the glove box 317 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features ■The power outlet can be used when Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode. CAUTION ■To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. ■To prevent battery discharge Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 318 3-5. Other interior features Seat heaters∗ ■The seat heaters can be used when The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode. ■When not in use Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off. ∗: If equipped Press the switch to warm the seats. The indicator light comes on when a seat heater is turned on. Rapid heating Normal heating 319 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features WARNING ■Burns ●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged • Persons with sensitive skin • Persons who are fatigued • Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. ●Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating. CAUTION ■To prevent seat heater damage Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■To prevent battery discharge Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running. 320 3-5. Other interior features Floor mat∗ ∗: If equipped Make sure to only use floor mats that are specifically designed for use with the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place on top of the carpet. Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets. Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place. *: Always align the Δ marks. STEP 1 STEP 2 * 321 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features WARNING Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■When installing the driver’s floor mat ●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are SUBARU Genuine floor mats. ●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat. ●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided. ●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. ●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down. ■Before driving ●Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor. ●With the engine stopped and the select lever in P (automatic transmission) or shift lever in neutral (manual transmission), fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat. 322 3-5. Other interior features HomeLink®∗ Programming HomeLink The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device. Indicator light Status indicators HomeLink buttons ∗: If equipped The HomeLink® Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. 323 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features ■ Before programming HomeLink ● Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. ● When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage. ● Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. ● It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training. ● Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Some vehicles may require the engine switch to be turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. ● Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Some vehicles may require the push-button ignition switch to be turned to the “ACC” or “ON” mode for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. 324 3-5. Other interior features ■ Programming a New HomeLink Button Press and release the HomeLink button that you would like to program. The HomeLink indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” →P. 328). Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 in. (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button that you would like to program. Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 in. (15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process. While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the hand-held remote button. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the handheld remote button. Some devices may require you to replace this “Programming a New HomeLink Button” with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. Refer to “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming”. (→P. 327) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 3 325 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features Press the HomeLink button that you would like to program and observe the indicator light. ● If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete. ● If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the programming instructions. STEP 4 326 3-5. Other interior features At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the “Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the device’s manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps. Firmly press and release the “Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete . Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP 7 327 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to “Garage Door Two-Way Communication”. (→P. 329) In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLink- Gentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website. ■ Gate Operator / Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace “Programming a New HomeLink Button” with the following: While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release (“cycle”) your device’s hand-held remote every two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button. If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. Proceed with “Programming a New HomeLink Button” to complete. STEP 8 STEP 3 STEP 4 328 3-5. Other interior features Using HomeLink To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the handheld remote of the device may also be used at any time. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a previously trained button, follow these steps: Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink button can be released at this point. Proceed with “Programming a New HomeLink Button” – . If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored programming. Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), follow the step noted: Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming a New HomeLink Button” – . STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 3 STEP 1 329 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features Two-Way Communication ■ Garage Door Two-Way Communication HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display “closing” or “opening” status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being “closed” or “opened”. HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 ft. (250 m).Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication. ■ Programming Two-Way Communication Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete. If the garage door status indicators do not flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found online at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex. 330 3-5. Other interior features ■ Using Two-Way Communication Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simultaneously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for three seconds. If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators. Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green) 331 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features ■Certification In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll- free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515. HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada 332 3-5. Other interior features WARNING ■When programming a garage door or other remote control devices When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage. ■Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink® Wireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. CAUTION ■Hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) Keep the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”. (→P. 328) 333 3-5. Other interior features 3 Interior features Compass∗ ∗: If equipped The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. ■ Operation To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle. Display Switch If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated. 334 3-5. Other interior features Calibrating the compass ■ To adjust for compass zone variance Find your current location and zone number on the map. Press and hold the switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display. Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop pressing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction. If the vehicle’s magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the switch for more than 9 seconds or until a “C” appears in the display. Once a “C” appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Maintenance and care 4 335 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior. 336 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior 342 Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara® area . 346 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements 348 General maintenance. 351 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 354 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions 355 Engine hood. 358 Engine compartment 360 Tires . 374 Tire inflation pressure 382 Wheels. 386 Air conditioning filter. 389 Transmitter/ access key battery . 392 Checking and replacing fuses 397 Light bulbs 405 336 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition. ● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. ● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Wipe away any water. ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. 337 4-1. Maintenance and care 4 Maintenance and care ■Automatic car washes ●Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to and extend the mirrors before driving. ●When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type to avoid scratches to the vehicle surface and harm to your vehicle’s paint. ●Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler. ●Vehicles with CFRP (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic) parts: Do not use automatic car washes as they may damage the rear wing or its finish. ■High pressure car washes ●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows and door frames as water may enter the cabin. ●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler lid on your vehicle is closed properly. ■Alloy wheels ●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. ●Wash detergent off with water immediately after use. ●To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions. • Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent • Do not use hard brushes • Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather ■Parts containing resin such as the bumper Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. 338 4-1. Maintenance and care ■Brake (vehicles with brembo brake) ●Painted brake calipers • When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the paint. • Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot. • Wash detergent off immediately after use. ●Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts. ■CFRP (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic) part (if equipped) ●Remove any dirt using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. ●As the CFRP parts may change color if they are exposed to ultraviolet rays for extended periods of time, SUBARU recommends that your vehicle be stored in a place where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight. ●Do not use wax that contains abrasives. ■When washing the vehicle Wear rubber gloves and use a hand brush when washing down underbody, inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt off. 339 4-1. Maintenance and care 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■When washing the vehicle ●Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake or electrical parts it will cause engine trouble or a malfunction of the power steering. ●When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ●When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers and protruding objects such as exhaust pipes and exhaust finishers, be careful to prevent injuries from contacting sharp ends. ■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers can cause burns. 340 4-1. Maintenance and care CAUTION ■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alloy wheels etc.) ●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • After driving near the sea coast • After driving on salted roads • If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface • If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint • After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels. ■Protective film for side sill plates Make sure to remove the protective film. Failure to do so may cause rust, depending on conditions. ■Cleaning the exterior lights ●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. ●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ■To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first. 341 4-1. Maintenance and care 4 Maintenance and care CAUTION ■When using a high pressure car wash Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water. • Traction related parts • Steering parts • Suspension parts • Brake parts ■Cleaning the rear bumper cherry red stripe (tS models) ●When using a high pressure car wash (pressure washer) to wash your vehicle, keep the nozzle a safe distance (11.9 in. [30 cm] or more) from the stripe. Do not use the high pressure car wash on the same area continuously. ●When using a heated or steam high pressure car wash or extra high-pressure pressure washer, do not point the nozzle directly at the stripe, otherwise the stripe may come off or be damaged. ●Carefully read the label of a car wash soap before using it, as some car wash soaps may adversely affect the adhesion strength of the stripe. ●If dirt cannot be removed from the stripe, clean it off using a soft cloth dampened with a neutral detergent diluted with water. ■Avoiding damage to the under spoilers (tS models) ●When cleaning the under spoilers, do not use organic substances such as gasoline, paint thinner, acidic or alkaline solutions, or other detergent. ●The under spoilers may deform if exposed to high temperatures or extreme heat. 342 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition: ■ Protecting the vehicle interior ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. ● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neural detergent diluted to approximately 1%. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water. ■ Cleaning the leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area. ■ Cleaning the synthetic leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water. 343 4-1. Maintenance and care 4 Maintenance and care ■Caring for leather areas SUBARU recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. ■Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■Seatbelts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. WARNING ■Water in the vehicle ●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire. ●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 98) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury. ■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 344 4-1. Maintenance and care CAUTION ■Cleaning detergents ●Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces. ●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged. ●Do not use a chemical agent containing silicone (highly-polymerized silicon compound) when cleaning any of the electrical appliances such as the air conditioning, all switches and their surrounding areas. If silicon (highly-polymerized silicon compound) contacts these components, it may cause the electrical appliances to malfunction. ■Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces. ●Remove any dust, dirt, sand, oil spots etc. on leather surfaces immediately. ●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. ●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. ■Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust. 345 4-1. Maintenance and care 4 Maintenance and care CAUTION ■Cleaning the inside of the rear window ●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires. ●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires. ■When cleaning the instrument panel When small grains of sand and so forth have gotten into instrument panel’s surface and cannot be wiped away using a cloth, use a clay bar without adding water. Forcibly trying to wipe the surface clean with a brush or sponge may scratch the surface or fragments of the cloth may be left in the surface. 346 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara® area∗ ∗: If equipped The following procedures will protect and keep your vehicle’s Alcantara® upholstery in top condition: ■ Day-to-day cleaning Perform the following procedures regularly (approximately once a month). Wipe the entire Alcantara® area with a soft cloth that has been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 104°F [40°C]) and squeezed out. Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Alcantara® upholstery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth. Once dry, brush the area with a soft brush. ■ Liquid stains ● If liquid is spilled, lightly pat the area with a tissue paper or similar to soak up the liquid. ● When mud, coffee, etc., has dried on the Alcantara® upholstery, remove it by lightly brushing the area with a soft brush or similar. We recommend using a vacuum cleaner to clean up the area after the above has been performed. When a stain cannot be removed using the above procedures, remove it by performing the following: Lightly wipe the stained area from the outside to the inside from multiple angles with a soft cloth that has been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 104°F [40°C]) and squeezed out. Do not wipe the area so strongly that it causes the Alcantara® upholstery surface to become uneven. Also, prepare a clean cloth, and always use a clean area of the cloth. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1 347 4-1. Maintenance and care 4 Maintenance and care ■When removing dirt or dust from the Alcantara® areas Remove dirt or dust from the Alcantara® areas by lighting brushing with a soft brush. If this does not remove the dirt or dust, remove it using adhesive tape. CAUTION ■When soaking up spilled liquids Do not press down too firmly with the cloth, tissue paper etc., as doing so may cause the liquid to further penetrate the material, making soaking up the liquid more difficult. If the Alcantara® upholstery surface becomes uneven, lightly brush it with a soft brush. Allow the surface to dry completely. ■ Oil stains You will need the following items: ● A cloth that has been dampened with benzene ● A dry cloth Using a dry cloth or tissue paper, wipe away as much of the oil as possible to prevent the stained area from expanding. After patting the area from the outside to the inside from multiple angles using the cloth dampened with benzene, soak up the oil and benzene that floats up by patting the area with a dry cloth. If the Alcantara® upholstery surface becomes uneven, lightly brush it with a soft brush. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 348 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements ■Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine SUBARU parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-SUBARU parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a SUBARU dealer performs repairs, warranty coverage may be affected. To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. SUBARU recommends the following maintenance. ■ General maintenance Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a SUBARU dealer. ■ Scheduled maintenance Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” (except for Canada) or “Warranty and Service Booklet” (for Canada). ■ Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of SUBARU Service Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” (except for Canada) or “Warranty and Service Booklet” (for Canada). 349 4-2. Maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a SUBARU dealer ●SUBARU technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. ●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your SUBARU dealer will promptly take care of it. 350 4-2. Maintenance WARNING ■If your vehicle is not properly maintained It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. ■Warning in handling of battery ●Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive. ●For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery. ●Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately. ●To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will result. ●Keep everyone including children away from the battery. ●Charge the battery in a well ventilated area. ●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling. 351 4-2. Maintenance 4 Maintenance and care General maintenance Engine compartment NOTE SUBARU does not endorse the use of non-SUBARU approved flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents which have not been tested or approved by SUBARU. SUBARU warranties do not cover any part of the vehicle which is damaged by adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those approved or recommended by SUBARU. Items Check points Battery Check the connections. (→P. 368) Brake fluid At the correct level? (→P. 366) Engine coolant At the correct level? (→P. 364) Engine oil At the correct level? (→P. 361) Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds? Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter? (→P. 366) Washer fluid At the correct level? (→P. 372) Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” (except for Canada) or “Warranty and Service Booklet” (for Canada). It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your SUBARU dealer or qualified service shop for advice. 352 4-2. Maintenance Vehicle interior Items Check points Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)? Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism • Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the select lever in P? Brake pedal • Moves smoothly? • Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play? Brakes • Not pull to one side when applied? • Loss of brake effectiveness? • Spongy feeling brake pedal? • Pedal almost touches floor? Clutch pedal • Moves smoothly? Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? Parking brake • Moves smoothly? • Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline? Seatbelts • Does the seatbelt system operate smoothly? • Are the belts undamaged? Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? Steering wheel • Moves smoothly? • Has correct free play? • No strange noises? 353 4-2. Maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Vehicle exterior Items Check points Door/trunk lid • Operate smoothly? Engine hood • The lock system works properly? Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking? Tire • Inflation pressure is correct? • Tire surfaces not worn or damaged? • Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule? •Wheel nuts are not loose? Windshield wipers • The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation. • The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping. WARNING ■If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 354 4-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/ M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your SUBARU dealer to service the vehicle. ■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: ● When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. ● When the fuel tank cap is loose The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. ■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your SUBARU dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. 355 4 Maintenance and care 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections. Items Parts and tools Battery condition (→P. 368) • Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) • Distilled water Brake fluid level (→P. 366) • FMVSS No.116 fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) Engine coolant level (→P. 364) • SUBARU Super Coolant or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. SUBARU Super Coolant is premixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant) Engine oil level (→P. 361) • SUBARU approved engine oil or equivalent • Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil) Fuses (→P. 397) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original 356 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools Light bulbs (→P. 405) • Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original • Phillips-head screwdriver • Flathead screwdriver Radiator and condenser (→P. 366)  Tire inflation pressure (→P. 382) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source Washer fluid (→P. 372) • Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel 357 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■When working in the engine compartment ●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. ●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment. ●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. ●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. ■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 366) Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Be sure the push-button ignition switch is off. With the push-button ignition switch in “ON” mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 366) ■Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes. CAUTION ■If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment. 358 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the engine hood. Pull the engine hood release lever. The engine hood will pop up slightly. Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the engine hood. Hold the engine hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 359 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■Pre-driving check Check that the engine hood is fully closed and locked. If the engine hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. CAUTION ■When opening the engine hood ●Do not lift up or operate the wipers. Doing so may cause the engine hood and wipers to contact, scratching the engine hood. ●Use caution when opening the engine hood in windy weather as it may close suddenly in strong wind. ●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine SUBARU products to the engine hood. Such additional weight on the engine hood may cause it to be too heavy to be supported by the supporting rod when opened. ■When closing the engine hood Do not apply excessive weight or force when closing the engine hood as doing so may result in damage. 360 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment Battery (→P. 368) Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 361) Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 366) Engine oil filler cap (→P. 362) Washer fluid tank (→P. 372) Electric cooling fans Condenser (→P. 366) Radiator (→P. 366) Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 364) Fuse box (→P. 397) 361 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Checking the engine oil Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out. Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. When checking the oil, look at both sides of the dipstick and use the lower measurement to determine the level of oil. Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. Low Full STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 362 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise. Engine oil selection →P. 496 Oil quantity (Low → Full) 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) Items Clean funnel ■Engine oil consumption Some engine oil will be consumed while driving. The rate of consumption can be affected by such factors as transmission type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil consumption can be increased and thus require refilling between maintenance intervals: ●When the engine is new and within the break-in period ●When the engine oil is of lower quality ●When the incorrect oil viscosity is used ●When engine braking is employed (repeatedly) STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 363 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ●When the engine is operated at high engine speeds (for extended periods of time) ●When the engine is operated under heavy loads (for extended periods of time) ●When the engine idles for extended periods of time ●When the vehicle is operated in stop and go and/or heavy traffic situations ●When the vehicle is used under severe thermal conditions ●When the vehicle accelerates and decelerates frequently Under these or similar conditions, you should check your oil at least every 2nd fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more frequently. Different drivers in the same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is greater than expected, contact your authorized SUBARU retailer who may perform a test under controlled conditions. WARNING ■Used engine oil ●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. ●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your SUBARU dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. ●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. 364 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. Reservoir cap “FULL” “LOW” If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. CAUTION ■To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis. ■When replacing the engine oil ●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you fill the oil. ●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened. ■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your SUBARU dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. 365 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■Coolant selection Only use SUBARU Super Coolant or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology. SUBARU Super Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your SUBARU dealer. WARNING ■When the engine is hot Do not remove the radiator cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns. CAUTION ■When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint. 366 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer. Brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank. “MAX” “MIN” WARNING ■When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns. 367 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■ Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid Items Clean funnel ■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. WARNING ■When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. CAUTION ■If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. 368 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Battery Check the battery as follows. ■ Battery exterior Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. Hold-down clamp Terminals ■ Checking battery fluid Check that the level is between “UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER LEVEL”. “UPPER LEVEL” “LOWER LEVEL” If the fluid level is at or below “LOWER LEVEL”, add distilled water. 369 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■ Adding distilled water Remove the vent plug. Add distilled water. If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking directly at the cell. Put the vent plug back on and close securely. Low O.K. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 370 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■Before recharging When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: ●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. ●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery. ■After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ●Unlocking the doors using the keyless access with push button start system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the remote keyless entry system or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors. ●Start the engine with the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” mode. The engine may not start with the push-button ignition switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt. ●The push-button ignition switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the push-button ignition switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the push-button ignition switch mode prior to discharge is unknown. If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your SUBARU dealer. 371 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■Chemicals in the battery A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery: ●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. ●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. ●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. ●Keep children away from the battery. ■Where to safely charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. ■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ●If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ●If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ●If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately. 372 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Washer fluid If the washer fluid level is at “LOW”, add washer fluid. CAUTION ■When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. ■When adding distilled water Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corrosion. ■Using the gauge The washer fluid level can be checked by observing the position of the level on the liquid-covered holes in the gauge. If the level falls below the second hole from the bottom (the “LOW” position), refill the washer fluid. CTH43AS134 Current fluid level 373 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc. CAUTION ■Washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying. ■Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle. 374 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear. ■ Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated. ■ Tire rotation Vehicles with a compact spare tire Rotate the tires in the order shown. To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, SUBARU recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Front 375 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure monitoring system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your SUBARU dealer. (→P. 376) Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires Rotate the tires in the order shown. To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, SUBARU recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. ■ The tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped) Your SUBARU is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (→P. 432) Front 376 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Registering ID codes (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your SUBARU dealer. ■When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage ●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your SUBARU dealer. ■Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. ■Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires The effectiveness of snow tires is lost. ■Low profile tires Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions. 377 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. ■Tire types 1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 277) For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P. 509) 378 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■Initializing the tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped) Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level. ■Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The tire pressure monitoring system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. ■Tire pressure monitoring system certification (if equipped) MODEL/FCC IDs: Transmitter: PAXPMVC010 Receiver: HYQ23AAA (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) HYQ23AAE (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 379 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■Tire pressure monitoring system operation (if equipped) The tire pressure monitoring system may not provide warning immediately if a tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs. ■When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ●Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires are the same for the following items: • Size • Circumference • Speed symbol • Load index • Construction • Manufacturer • Brand (tread pattern) • Degrees of wear You must obey the specification printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver’s door pillar. If all four tires are not the same in items listed above, there is a possibility that it may lead to serious mechanical damage to the drive train of your car and affect the following. • Ride • Handling • Braking • Speedometer/Odometer calibration • Clearance between the body and the tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control as well as an accident. ●Only use radial tires. ●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. ●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. 380 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) ●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your SUBARU dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly. ●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck. ■Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. ■Low profile tires and wheels Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following: ●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely. ●Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage. 381 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care CAUTION ■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. ■Wheel balance Although the wheels are correctly balanced when the vehicle is first delivered, they will become imbalanced as the tires wear. An imbalanced wheel may cause the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and may affect the vehicle’s straight-line stability. If you notice abnormal tire wear or vibration in the steering wheel, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■Wheel alignment Incorrect wheel alignment can result in uneven tire wear reducing the stability of the vehicle. If you notice uneven tire wear, contact a SUBARU dealer to have the wheel alignment inspected. 382 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire inflation pressure ■ Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 502) 383 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. ■ Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Reinstall the tire valve cap. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 384 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ●Reduced fuel economy ●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling ●Reduced tire life due to wear ●Reduced safety ●Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer. ■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ●Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ●Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance. ●It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. ●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. 385 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: ●Excessive wear ●Uneven wear ●Poor handling ●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ●Air leaking from between tire and wheel ●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage ●Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.) CAUTION ■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure. 386 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control. ■ Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your SUBARU dealer. *: Conventionally referred to as “offset”. SUBARU does not recommend using: ● Wheels of different sizes or types ● Used wheels ● Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ Alloy wheel precautions ● Use only SUBARU wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your alloy wheels. ● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ● Be careful not to damage the alloy wheels when using tire chains. ● Use only SUBARU genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. 387 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The wheels of your SUBARU are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure monitoring system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 375) WARNING ■When replacing wheels ●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. ●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. ■When installing the wheel nuts ●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. ●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Tapered portion 388 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) ●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your SUBARU dealer. ●Ensure that only genuine SUBARU wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels. 389 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. ■ Removal method Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Turn the engine switch off. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system Turn the push-button ignition switch off. Open the glove box. Slide off the damper. Push in each side of the glove box and pull the glove box toward you to disconnect the claws. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 390 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Lower the glove box slowly until surface is horizontal with the floor, then pull it out. (Simply pulling with gentle force will disengage the lower claws.) Lower claw Lower claw engagement point Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower claw engagement points may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or close the glove box. Remove the filter cover. Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one. The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up. When installing, reverse the steps listed. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 391 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” [except for Canada] or “Warranty and Service Booklet” [for Canada].) ■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. CAUTION ■When removing the glove box Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower claw engagement points may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or close the glove box. ■When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system. 392 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Transmitter/access key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. ■ You will need the following items: ● Flathead screwdriver ● Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or CR2032 (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ■ Replacing the battery (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) Remove the cover. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. To prevent the buttons from being disassembled, face the button surface downward. Remove the module. STEP 1 STEP 2 393 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Open the case cover using a coin protected with tape and remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up. ■ Replacing the battery (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Take out the mechanical key. Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the groove and remove the cover. To prevent damage to the key, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with protective tape. STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 Groove 394 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Remove the depleted battery. To prevent damage to the key, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with protective tape. Install a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up, as shown in the illustration. Align the protruding part with the slot and install the cover. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 395 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) or CR2032 (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) lithium battery ●Batteries can be purchased at your SUBARU dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores. ●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. ●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws. ■If the key battery is depleted The following symptoms may occur: ●The keyless access with push button start system (if equipped) and remote keyless entry system will not function properly. ●The operational range will be reduced. ■When putting the module back (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system) WARNING ■Removed battery and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury. Insert the module from directly above. Inserting it on an angle may prevent the key buttons from operating properly. 396 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: ●Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control. ●Do not bend either of the battery terminals. ■Precaution before replacing the battery Before replacing the battery, touch a metallic object to remove any static electricity from your body. 397 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Turn the engine switch off. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system Turn the push-button ignition switch off. Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. Instrument panel Remove the lid. STEP 1 STEP 2 398 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (→P. 400) for details about which fuse to check. Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. Check if the fuse has blown. Type A Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 399 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your SUBARU dealer. Type D Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your SUBARU dealer. 400 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse layout and amperage ratings ■ Engine compartment Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 MIR HTR 7.5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers 2 RDI 25 A Electric cooling fan 3 (PUSH-AT) 7.5 A Engine control unit 4 ABS NO. 1 40 A ABS 5 HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system 6 WASHER 10 A Windshield washer 7 WIPER 30 A Windshield wipers 8 RR DEF 30 A Rear window defogger 9 (RR FOG) 10 A  10 D FR DOOR 25 A Power window (driver’s side) 11 (CDS) 25 A Electric cooling fan 12 D-OP 25 A  13 ABS NO. 2 25 A ABS 14 D FL DOOR 25 A Power window (passenger’s side) 15 SPARE See note. Spare fuse 401 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care 16 SPARE See note. Spare fuse 17 SPARE See note. Spare fuse 18 SPARE See note. Spare fuse 19 SPARE See note. Spare fuse 20 SPARE See note. Spare fuse 21 ST 7.5 A Starting system 22 ALT-S 7.5 A  23 (STR LOCK) 7.5 A Steering lock system 24 D/L 20 A Power door lock 25 ETCS 15 A Engine control unit 26 (AT+B) 7.5 A Transmission 27 (AM2 NO. 2) 7.5 A Keyless access with push button start system 28 EFI (CTRL) 15 A Engine control unit 29 EFI (HTR) 15 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 30 EFI (IGN) 15 A Starting system 31 EFI (+B) 7.5 A Engine control unit 32 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, hazard warning flashers 33 MPX-B 7.5 A Automatic air conditioning system, gauge and meters 34 F/PMP 20 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 35 IG2 MAIN 30 A SRS airbag system, engine control unit 36 DCC 30 A Interior light, remote keyless entry system, main body ECU Fuse Ampere Circuit 402 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Note One of each of the following spare fuses are provided: 7.5 A, 10 A, 15 A, 20 A, 25 A, 30 A. 37 HORN NO. 2 7.5 A Horn 38 HORN NO. 1 7.5 A Horn 39 H-LP LH LO 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam) 40 H-LP RH LO 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam) 41 H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam) 42 H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam) 43 INJ 30 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 44 H-LP WASHER 30 A  45 AM2 NO. 1 40 A Starting system, engine control unit 46 EPS 80 A Electric power steering 47 A/B MAIN 15 A SRS airbag system 48 ECU-B 7.5 A Remote keyless entry system, main body ECU 49 DOME 20 A Interior light 50 IG2 7.5 A Engine control unit Fuse Ampere Circuit 403 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■ Instrument panel Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 ECU ACC 10 A Main body ECU, outside rear view mirrors 2 P/POINT No.2 15 A Power outlet 3 PANEL 10 A Illumination 4 TAIL 10 A Tail lights 5 DRL 10 A Daytime running light system 6 UNIT IG1 10A  7 STOP 7.5 A Stop lights 8 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system 9 HEATER-S 7.5 A Air conditioning system 10 HEATER 10 A Air conditioning system 11 FR FOG LH 10 A Left-hand front fog light 12 FR FOG RH 10 A Right-hand front fog light 13 BK/UP LP 7.5 A Back-up lights 14 ECU IG1 10 A ABS, electric power steering 15 AM1 7.5 A Starting system 16 AMP 15 A Audio system 17 AT UNIT 15 A Transmission 18 GAUGE 7.5 A Gauge and meters, keyless access with push button start system 19 ECU IG2 10 A Engine control unit 20 SEAT HTR LH 10 A Left-hand seat heater 21 SEAT HTR RH 10 A Right-hand seat heater 22 RADIO 7.5 A Audio system 23 P/POINT No.1 15 A Power outlet 404 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■After a fuse is replaced ●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 405) ●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. ■If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage. WARNING ■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. ●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ●Always use a genuine SUBARU fuse or equivalent. ●Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box. CAUTION ■Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your SUBARU dealer. 405 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your SUBARU dealer. ■ Preparing a replacement light bulb Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 504) ■ Front bulb locations Front side marker lights 406 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Rear bulb locations ■ Inside bulb locations Back-up lights License plate lights Interior light Vanity lights (if equipped) 407 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care Replacing light bulbs ■ Front side marker lights Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the light to be replaced. Turn the steering wheel to a point that allows your hand to easily fit between the tire and fender liner. Remove the clips and partly remove the fender liner. To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Release the light’s claw. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. While firmly pushing the screwdriver forward, move it towards the inside of the vehicle. To prevent damage to the vehicle, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with a tape. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 408 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Pull out the lamp and turn the lens counterclockwise. Remove the light bulb. When installing, reverse the steps listed. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 409 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■ Back-up lights Remove the clips. To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Remove the light bulb. When installing, reverse the steps listed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 410 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ License plate lights Remove the trunk lid panel cover clips and partly remove the trunk lid panel cover. To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. Remove the light bulb. When installing, reverse the steps listed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 411 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■ Interior light Remove the lens. To prevent damage to the interior light, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Remove the light bulb. When installing, reverse the steps listed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 412 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Vanity lights (if equipped) Open the cover and remove the lens. To prevent damage to the vanity light, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Remove the light bulb. When installing, reverse the steps listed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 413 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care ■ Replacing the following bulbs If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your SUBARU dealer. ● Headlights ● Parking lights/daytime running lights ● Front turn signal lights ● Front fog lights (if equipped) ● Stop/tail lights ● Stop lights ● Rear turn signal lights ● Rear side marker lights ● High mounted stoplight ● Door courtesy lights (if equipped) ● Trunk light 414 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your SUBARU dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the light lens does not indicate a malfunction. ●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. ●Water has built up inside the light. ■LED light bulbs The headlights, parking lights/daytime running lights, front turn signal lights, front fog lights (if equipped), stop/tail lights, stop lights, rear turn signal lights, rear side marker lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer to have the light replaced. ■When replacing light bulbs SUBARU recommends that you use genuine SUBARU products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable. ■Removing and installing the luggage trim cover and trunk lid panel cover clip Removing Installing 415 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 4 Maintenance and care WARNING ■Replacing light bulbs ●Only replace a bulb when it is cool enough to touch. Do not attempt to replace bulbs while they are hot, as doing so may cause burns. ●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack. ●Fully install the light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering a light unit. This may damage the light or cause condensation to build up on the inner side of the lens. ■When changing the back-up lights Stop the engine and wait until the exhaust pipes have cooled down sufficiently. The lights are located near the exhaust pipe and touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns. ■To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. 416 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance When trouble arises 5 417 5-1. Essential information Hazard warning flashers 418 If your vehicle needs to be towed 419 If you think something is wrong . 426 Fuel pump shut off system . 427 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds. . 428 If a warning message is displayed 440 If you have a flat tire. 457 If the engine will not start 471 If the select lever cannot be shifted from P 474 If you lose your keys 475 If the access key does not operate properly. 476 If the battery is discharged . 480 If your vehicle overheats . 485 If the vehicle becomes stuck 488 418 5-1. Essential information Hazard warning flashers ■Hazard warning flashers If the hazard warning flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may discharge. The hazard warning flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc. Press the switch. All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again. When the turn signal lights are flashing, the corresponding turn signal indicator will also flash. 5 When trouble arises 419 5-1. Essential information If your vehicle needs to be towed Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet to move the vehicle to a safe location or to free a stuck vehicle from sand or snow. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing eyelet may be used. Towing eyelet If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service, using a flat bed truck. The vehicle must be secured properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. 420 5-1. Essential information ■Before emergency towing Release the parking brake. Shift the select lever to N (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever to neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission). Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running) position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running) mode. ■If towing a vehicle Do not tow another vehicle. If towing a vehicle that has broken down is unavoidable, avoid towing a vehicle that is heavier than your vehicle. Also, do not pull out a vehicle that has fallen into a ditch. WARNING ■Caution while towing ●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing. ●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 5 When trouble arises 421 5-1. Essential information Installing towing eyelet Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver. To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag. Front CAUTION ■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission in emergency towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. ■To prevent damage to the vehicle ●When towing this vehicle, make sure to observe the following: • Do not use a wire rope • Keep vehicle speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) and do not tow for distances over 19 miles (30 km) • Tow the vehicle in the forward direction • Do not apply rope to the vehicle’s suspension and so forth ●Do not tow another vehicle, boat (trailer) and so forth, that is heavier than this vehicle. ■When towing down a long slope Use a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck. (→P. 424, 425) If a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck is not used, the brakes may overheat, leading to poor brake performance. STEP 1 422 5-1. Essential information Rear Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench. STEP 2 STEP 3 ■Location of the emergency towing eyelet →P. 457 5 When trouble arises 423 5-1. Essential information Towing with a sling-type truck WARNING ■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death. ■After towing ●Always remove the towing eyelet. Failure to do so can cause the SRS airbags to not operate correctly in the event of a frontal collision. ●Always remove the towing eyelets. Failure to do so may prevent the fuel pump shut off system from operating properly if the vehicle receives an impact from the rear. 424 5-1. Essential information CAUTION ■To prevent body damage Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. ■Towing with a wheel lift-type truck is not recommended If a flat bed truck is not available, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the drive train or body. From the front From the rear Never tow a vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. Ensure that the front lower body components have adequate clearance to prevent contact with the road surface under all conditions. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position so that the steering wheel is unlocked. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked. 5 When trouble arises 425 5-1. Essential information Using a flat bed truck If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. 426 5-1. Essential information If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ■ Visible symptoms ● Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal ● Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or illuminates ■ Audible symptoms ● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the engine ■ Operational symptoms ● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough ● Appreciable loss of power ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road ● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor 5 When trouble arises 427 5-1. Essential information Fuel pump shut off system Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Restart the engine. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode or turn it off. Restart the engine. CAUTION ■Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system operates to stop supplying fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1 STEP 2 428 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your SUBARU dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) Brake system warning light • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally. Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. 5 When trouble arises 429 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your SUBARU dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system. Low engine oil pressure warning light Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low. (Flashes or illuminates in red) High engine coolant temperature warning light (if equipped) Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (→P. 485) As the engine coolant temperature increases, this warning light will change from flashing to constantly illuminated. 430 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the vehicle inspected immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. Warning light Warning light/Details (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: • The electronic engine control system; • The electronic throttle control system; • The electronic automatic transmission control system. SRS airbag system warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; • The seatbelt pretensioner system; • The front passenger occupant detection system. (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; • The brake assist system. Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer) Indicates a malfunction in the electric power steering system. Slip indicator Indicates a malfunction in: • The Vehicle stability control (VSC) system; • The TRAC system; • The hill start assist system. Automatic headlight leveling system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system. 5 When trouble arises 431 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency (Comes on in yellow) Cruise control indicator light Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system. ■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: ●Is the fuel tank empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ●Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips. If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ■SRS airbag system warning light →P. 129 ■Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer) The electric power steering warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound when the voltage is low or the voltage drops. WARNING ■When the electric power steering warning light comes on The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual. Warning light Warning light/Details 432 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Open door warning light (if equipped) Indicates that a door or the trunk lid is not fully closed. Check that both side doors and the trunk lid are closed. (Comes on in yellow) Low fuel level warning light Remaining fuel (Approximately 1.8 gal. [7.0 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.] or less) Refuel the vehicle. (On the instrument cluster) Driver’s seatbelt reminder light (warning buzzer)*1 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seatbelt. Fasten the seatbelt. (On the center panel) Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her seatbelt. Fasten the seatbelt. 5 When trouble arises 433 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Tire pressure warning light (if equipped) When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as • Natural causes (→P. 435) • Flat tire (→P. 457) Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. When the light comes on after blinking for approximately one minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure monitoring system (→P. 436) Have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (if equipped) Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the select lever to P. If the light goes off after a little while, the vehicle can be driven. If the light does not go off, contact your SUBARU dealer. Master warning light (if equipped) A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. →P. 440 Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure 434 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency *1: Driver’s seatbelt buzzer: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system The driver’s seatbelt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seatbelt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seatbelt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seatbelt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system The driver’s seatbelt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seatbelt is not fastened. Once the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seatbelt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seatbelt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. *2: Front passenger’s seatbelt buzzer: The front passenger’s seatbelt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seatbelt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seatbelt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seatbelt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. 5 When trouble arises 435 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■Low fuel level warning light When the vehicle is on an incline, curve and so forth, the fuel inside the tank moves, which may cause the warning light to come on early. ■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seatbelt reminder and warning buzzer ●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and warning buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. ●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly. ■When the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped) Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. ■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes (if equipped) The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). ■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes. 436 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■If the tire pressure monitoring system is inoperative (if equipped) The tire pressure monitoring system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used. ●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. ●If the tire inflation pressure is 55 psi (380 kPa, 3.87 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher. The tire pressure monitoring system may be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby. ●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. ●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. ●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings. ●If non-genuine SUBARU wheels are used. (Even if you use SUBARU wheels, the tire pressure monitoring system may not work properly with some types of tires.) ●If tire chains are used. ●If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the trunk. ■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for approximately one minute (if equipped) If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for approximately one minute when the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) or the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), have it checked your SUBARU dealer. 5 When trouble arises 437 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■If the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped) Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. ●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest SUBARU dealer. ●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The tire pressure monitoring system may not activate immediately. 438 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 5 When trouble arises 439 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION ■To ensure the tire pressure monitoring system operates properly (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. 440 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with a color multi-information display) Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your SUBARU dealer. Warning message Details (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) Indicates that: • The brake fluid level is low; or • The brake system is malfunctioning A buzzer also sounds. If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions: Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. Multi-information display If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your SUBARU dealer. 5 When trouble arises 441 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your SUBARU dealer. Warning message Details (Comes on in red) Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (→P. 485) A buzzer also sounds. 442 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the vehicle inspected immediately. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; • The seatbelt pretensioner system; • The front passenger occupant detection system. A buzzer also sounds. (U.S.A.) (Canada and Mexico) Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; • The brake assist system. A buzzer also sounds. Indicates a malfunction in the electric power steering system. A buzzer also sounds. 5 When trouble arises 443 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) Indicates a malfunction in the keyless access with push button start system. A buzzer also sounds. Warning message Details 444 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off. Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), flashes to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed. Make sure that both side doors are closed. Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h), flashes to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed. Close the trunk. 5 When trouble arises 445 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency *: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high. A buzzer also sounds. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the select lever to P. If the message is cleared after a little while, the vehicle can be driven. If the message is not cleared, contact your SUBARU dealer. (Flashes) Indicates that the pushbutton ignition switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on. A buzzer also sounds. Turn the lights off. (Comes on in yellow) Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 1.8 gal. (7.0 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.) or less The estimated remaining driving range will be displayed under this warning message.* Refuel the vehicle. Roads may be icy due to the low outside temperature. Drive carefully avoiding sudden acceleration, sudden braking, sudden deceleration, and sharp turns. Warning message Details Correction procedure 446 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the malfunction repaired immediately. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure Once  (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) Indicates that the access key is not present when attempting to start the engine. Confirm the location of the access key. Once 3 times (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the push-button ignition switch in any mode other than off and the access key outside of the detection area. Confirm the location of the access key. 5 When trouble arises 447 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Once 3 times (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) The access key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver’s door was opened and closed while the shift position P was selected without turning off the push-button ignition switch. Turn the push-button ignition switch off or bring the access key back into the vehicle. Once 3 times (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) (Vehicles with a manual transmission) The access key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver’s door was opened and closed while the shift position neutral was selected without turning off the push-button ignition switch. Turn the push-button ignition switch off or bring the access key back into the vehicle. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 448 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Once Continuous (5 seconds) (Displayed alternately) (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the access key and touch the lock sensor to lock the doors without first turning the pushbutton ignition switch off. Turn the push-button ignition switch off and lock the doors again. Intermittently (7 seconds)  (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle. Confirm that the access key is inside the vehicle. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 5 When trouble arises 449 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Continuous  (Flashes) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) The driver’s door was opened while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the push-button ignition switch. Shift the select lever to P. Continuous Continuous (Displayed alternately) (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) The access key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver’s door was opened and closed while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the push-button ignition switch. • Shift the select lever to P. • Bring the access key back into the vehicle. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 450 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency  Continuous (5 seconds) (Flashes) An attempt was made to lock the doors using the keyless access with push button start system while the access key was still inside the vehicle. Retrieve the access key from the vehicle and lock the doors again. Once Continuous (5 seconds) (Flashes) An attempt was made to lock either door by opening a door and putting the lock lever into the lock position, then closing the door by pulling on the outside door handle with the access key still inside the vehicle. Retrieve the access key from the vehicle and lock the doors again. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 5 When trouble arises 451 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Once  (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) • When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the push-button ignition switch was pressed, the access key could not be detected in the vehicle. • The access key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the push-button ignition switch was pressed two consecutive times. Touch the access key to the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 452 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Once  (Flashes) (Flashes in yellow) (Vehicles with a manual transmission) • When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the push-button ignition switch was pressed, the access key could not be detected in the vehicle. • The access key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the push-button ignition switch was pressed two consecutive times. Touch the access key to the push-button ignition switch while depressing the clutch pedal. Once  (Flashes) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) An attempt was made to start the engine with the select lever in an incorrect position. Shift the select lever to P and start the engine. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 5 When trouble arises 453 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency   Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function. Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery. Once  (Flashes in yellow) Indicates that the access key battery is low. Replace the battery. (→P. 392) Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 454 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Once  (Flashes) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) The driver’s door was opened and closed with the push-button ignition switch turned off and then the push-button ignition switch was put in “ACC” mode twice without the engine being started. Press the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal. During an engine starting procedure in the event that the access key was not functioning properly (→P. 477), the push-button ignition switch was touched with the access key. Press the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 5 When trouble arises 455 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Once  (Flashes) (Vehicles with a manual transmission) The driver’s door was opened and closed with the push-button ignition switch turned off and then the push-button ignition switch was put in “ACC” mode twice without the engine being started. Press the push-button ignition switch while depressing the clutch pedal. During an engine starting procedure in the event that the access key was not functioning properly (→P. 477), the push-button ignition switch was touched with the access key. Press the push-button ignition switch while depressing the clutch pedal within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding. Once  (Flashes) (Flashes quickly in green) Indicates that the steering lock has not been released. Release the steering lock. (→P. 179) Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 456 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Continuous  (Flashes) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) The push-button ignition switch has been turned off with the select lever in a position other than P. Shift the select lever to P. Once  (Flashes) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) After the pushbutton ignition switch has been turned off with the select lever in a position other than P, the select lever has been shifted to P. Turn the push-button ignition switch off. ■Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound. Interior buzzer Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction procedure 5 When trouble arises 457 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire. ■ Before jacking up the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the select lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever to R (vehicles with a manual transmission). ● Stop the engine. ● Turn on the hazard warning flashers. (→P. 418) ■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools Vehicles with a compact spare tire *:Vehicles with a T145/70D17 compact spare tire Jack Jack handle Spare tire Towing eyelet Screwdriver Wheel nut wrench Spacer* 458 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires Jack handle Spare tire Towing eyelet Screwdriver Jack Wheel nut wrench 5 When trouble arises 459 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the spare tire Vehicles with a compact spare tire Remove the luggage mat. Remove the cover and loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. STEP 1 STEP 2 460 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Replacing a flat tire STEP 1 Chock the tires. Flat tire Wheel chock positions Front Lefthand side Behind the rear righthand side tire Righthand side Behind the rear lefthand side tire Rear Lefthand side In front of the front right-hand side tire Righthand side In front of the front left-hand side tire 5 When trouble arises 461 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 462 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Installing the spare tire Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle. Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand to approximately the same amount. Vehicles with a compact spare tire: Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat. Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires: Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel. STEP 1 STEP 2 Tapered portion Disc wheel seat Disc wheel Tapered portion 5 When trouble arises 463 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Lower the vehicle. Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. Tightening torque: 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. (→P. 465) STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 464 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■The compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire) ●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency. ●Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (→P. 502) ■When using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. ■If you have a flat rear tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire) Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps. Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire. Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle. ■After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) The tire pressure monitoring system must be reset. (→P. 375) STEP 1 STEP 2 5 When trouble arises 465 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■Storing a tire (for compact spare tire) ■Storing a tire (except compact spare tire) Vehicles with a T145/70D17 compact spare tire only: Install the spare tire spacer with the “Ft↑” mark facing the front of the vehicle and the rear edge of the spacer contacting the vehicle body. Install the center fastener as shown in the illustration. STEP 1 STEP 2 Vehicles with a T145/70D17 compact spare tire only: Before stowing the flat tire, remove the spare tire spacer. Install the center fastener as shown in the illustration. STEP 1 STEP 2 466 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■Using the tire jack Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack. ●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. ●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. ●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack. ●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. ●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it. ●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured. 5 When trouble arises 467 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■Replacing a flat tire ●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns. ●Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. ●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. • Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. • When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel. • If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer. • When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 387) 468 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■When using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire) ●Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle. ●Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously. ●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. ●Install the compact spare tire on a front wheel. ■When storing the compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire) Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact spare tire and the body of the vehicle. ■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire) Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. 5 When trouble arises 469 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■When the compact spare tire is attached (vehicles with a compact spare tire) The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: ●ABS & brake assist ●Vehicle stability control (VSC) ●TRAC ●Electric power steering ●Navigation system (if equipped) ●Cruise control 470 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire. Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. ■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle (vehicles with a compact spare tire). The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. ■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire) Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. ■When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your SUBARU dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system) When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 375) ■Stowing the jack When stowing the jack in the jack holder, make sure that the part that the jack handle attaches to is pointing towards the inside of the trunk. Failure to do so may damage the vehicle body. 5 When trouble arises 471 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the engine will not start If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (→P. 172, 182), consider each of the following points. ■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. ● The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (→P. 172, 182) ● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 82) ■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 480) ● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. ■ The starter motor does not turn over. (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 472) 472 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Emergency start function (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the push-button ignition switch is functioning normally: Vehicles with an automatic transmission Set the parking brake. Put the select lever in P. Set the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode. Press and hold the push-button ignition switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer. ■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 480) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Contact your SUBARU dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 5 When trouble arises 473 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Vehicles with a manual transmission Set the parking brake. Put the shift lever in neutral. Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode. Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal firmly. Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 474 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the select lever cannot be shifted from P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) If the select lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the select lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the select lever can be shifted. Set the parking brake. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode. Depress the brake pedal. Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Press the shift lock release button. The select lever can be shifted while the button is pressed. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 5 When trouble arises 475 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine keys can be made by your SUBARU dealer. For vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key number plate. 476 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the access key does not operate properly (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Unlocking and locking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid Use the mechanical key built in to the access keys to operate the doors and trunk lid. (→P. 23) The mechanical key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again. Vehicles with an alarm: An alarm will sound if the alarm is set when the trunk lid or doors are unlocked. (→P. 87) Doors Locks driver’s door Unlocks driver’s door If communication between the access key and vehicle is interrupted (→P. 31) or the access key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the keyless access with push button start system and remote keyless entry system cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk lid can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below. 5 When trouble arises 477 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Trunk lid Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. Starting the engine Vehicles with an automatic transmission Ensure that the select lever is in P and firmly depress the brake pedal. Touch the area behind the lock button and unlock button on the access key to the push-button ignition switch. When the access key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the pushbutton ignition switch will turn to “ON” mode. When the keyless access with push button start system is deactivated in customization setting, the push-button ignition switch will turn to “ACC” mode. Modes can be changed by pressing the pushbutton ignition switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) turns on. Press the push-button ignition switch. In the event that the push-button ignition switch still cannot be operated, contact your SUBARU dealer. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 478 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Vehicles with a manual transmission Ensure that the shift lever is in neutral and depress the clutch pedal. Touch the area behind the lock button and unlock button on the access key to the push-button ignition switch. When the access key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the pushbutton ignition switch will turn to “ON” mode. When the keyless access with push button start system is deactivated in customization setting, the push-button ignition switch will turn to “ACC” mode. Modes can be changed by pressing the pushbutton ignition switch with the clutch pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.) Firmly depress the clutch pedal and check that the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green) turns on. Press the push-button ignition switch. In the event that the push-button ignition switch still cannot be operated, contact your SUBARU dealer. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 5 When trouble arises 479 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■Stopping the engine Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the select lever to P and press the push-button ignition switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to neutral and press the push-button ignition switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. ■Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the access key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (→P. 392) ■Alarm (if equipped) Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system. If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered. (→P. 87) ■If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the keyless access with push button start system Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or remote keyless entry system. 480 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged. You can call your SUBARU dealer or a qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle following the steps below. Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedures: Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration. STEP 1 5 When trouble arises 481 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system only: Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the push-button ignition switch off. Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, then start the vehicle’s engine. Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode, then start the vehicle’s engine. Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 482 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting. ■Avoiding a discharged battery ●Turn off the headlights and the air conditioning system while the engine is off. ●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc. ■Charging the battery The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.) ■Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) ●In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the keyless access with push button start system when the battery is discharged. Use the remote keyless entry system or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. ●The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. ●The push-button ignition switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the push-button ignition switch off. If you are unsure what mode the push-button ignition switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery. 5 When trouble arises 483 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery. ●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. ●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals. ●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery. ■Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery. ●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ●Do not lean over the battery. ●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ●Do not allow children near the battery. ■To prevent damage to the vehicle Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard. 484 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them. ■When closing the doors While pushing the door glass towards the inside of the vehicle, slowly close the door. Because the side window open/close function linked to door operation will not operate, the window may interfere with the vehicle body, possibly scratching both the vehicle body and window, or even shattering the window. 5 When trouble arises 485 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats Correction procedures Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine. If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood. After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. Radiator Cooling fans If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer. The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating. ● Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 199) enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced (for example, the vehicle speed does not increase). Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant temperature warning light (→P. 203) flashes or illuminates or a loss of engine power is experienced (for example, the vehicle speed does not increase). ● Steam comes out from under the hood. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 486 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir. Reservoir “FULL” “LOW” Radiator cap Add coolant if necessary. Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable. Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses. The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.) If the fans are not operating: Stop the engine immediately and contact your SUBARU dealer. If the fans are operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest SUBARU dealer. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 5 When trouble arises 487 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle ●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injuries such as burns. ●Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury. ●Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure. CAUTION ■When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. ■To prevent damage to the cooling system Observe the following precautions: ●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.). ●Do not use any coolant additives. 488 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck ■When it is difficult to free the vehicle Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow: Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the select lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever to neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission). Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels. Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction. Restart the engine. Shift the select lever to the D or R position (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift lever to 1 or R position (vehicles with a manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Press to turn off TRAC. (→P. 258) 5 When trouble arises 489 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency WARNING ■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■When shifting the select lever For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the select lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. CAUTION ■To avoid damage to the transmission and other components ●Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary. ●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed. 490 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Vehicle specifications 6 491 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.). 492 Fuel information . 505 Tire information 509 6-2. Customization Customizable features . 522 492 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight *1: Except tS models *2: tS models *3: Unladen vehicle Overall length 166.7 in. (4235 mm)*1 167.7 in. (4260 mm)*2 Overall width 69.9 in. (1775 mm) Overall height*3 52.0 in. (1320 mm) Wheelbase 101.2 in. (2570 mm) Tread Front 59.8 in. (1520 mm) Rear 60.6 in. (1540 mm) Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) Details are described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 382) 493 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your SUBARU. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped under the right-hand front seat. This number is located on the top left of the body panel. This number is also on the Certification Label. 494 6-1. Specifications ■ Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 495 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Engine Fuel *: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. Model FA20 Type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4- stroke gasoline Bore and stroke 3.4 × 3.4 in. (86 × 86 mm) Displacement 121.9 cu.in. (1998 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane rating 93 AKI (98 RON) or higher* Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 13.2 gal. (50 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.) 496 6-1. Specifications Lubrication system *: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Engine oil selection Always use SUBARU approved engine oil. For details, we recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer. If approved engine oil is unavailable, another motor oil of matching quality can also be used. Oil grade: ILSAC GF5 multigrade engine oil API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING” Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change. Oil capacity (Drain and refill  reference*) • Without filter • With filter 5.5 qt. (5.2 L, 4.6 Imp. qt.) 5.7 qt. (5.4 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.) Outside temperature 497 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example): • The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. • The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions. How to read oil container labels: Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. API Service Symbol Top portion: The oil quality designation by API (American Petroleum Institute) (SN) Center portion: The SAE viscosity grade (SAE 0W-20) Lower portion: “RESOURCE CONSERVING” means that the oil has fuel saving and environmental protection capabilities. ILSAC Certification Mark The ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container. 498 6-1. Specifications Cooling system Ignition system Capacity Vehicles with an automatic transmission 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.) Vehicles with a manual transmission 7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp. qt.) Coolant type Use either of the following. • SUBARU Super Coolant • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. Spark plug Make Gap DENSO ZXE27HBR8 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) CAUTION ■Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine. 499 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Electrical system Differential Battery Specific gravity reading at 68°F (20°C): 1.250  1.290 Fully charged 1.160  1.200 Half charged 1.060  1.100 Discharged Charging rates Quick charge Slow charge 15 A max. 5 A max. Oil capacity (Reference) 1.20 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 Imp. qt.) Oil type and viscosity • Differential Gear Oil LX • Other gear oil that meets API GL-5 and SAE 75W-85 or GL-5 and SAE 75W-90 specifications CAUTION ■Differential gear oil Using a differential gear oil other than Differential Gear Oil LX may cause occurrences of rattling noises and vibrations while idling and poor fuel consumption. Never use different brands together. 500 6-1. Specifications Automatic transmission *: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your SUBARU dealer. Manual transmission Clutch Fluid capacity* 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.) Fluid type ATF WS Gear oil capacity (Reference) 2.3 qt. (2.2 L, 1.9 Imp. qt.) Gear oil type and viscosity Use either of the following: • “MG Gear Oil special II” • Other gear oil that meets API GL-3, GL- 4, or GL-5 and SAE 75W-90 specifications CAUTION ■Manual transmission gear oil If oil other than “MG Gear Oil special II” is used, the following may be experienced: ●The overall performance and function of the transmission may be adversely affected. ●Rattling noises may occur during idling and fuel consumption may increase. Never use different brands together. Pedal free play 0.2  0.6 in. (5  15 mm) Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid 501 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Brakes *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running. *2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf). ■ Brake disc If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer. Pedal clearance*1 2.16 in. (55 mm) Min. Pedal free play 0.020  0.106 in. (0.5  2.7 mm) Brake pad wear limit (vehicles without brembo brake) Front 0.059 in. (1.5 mm) Rear 0.059 in. (1.5 mm) Brake pad wear limit (vehicles with brembo brake) Front 0.047 in. (1.2 mm) Rear 0.061 in. (1.55 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.059 in. (1.5 mm) Parking brake lever travel*2 7  8 clicks Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid Brake pedal Pedal clearance Carpet 502 6-1. Specifications Steering Tires and wheels (for vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada) Type A Type B Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Tire size 215/45R17 87W, T135/80D16 101M Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 17 × 7 J, 16 × 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) Tire size 215/45R17 87W, T145/70D17 106M Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 17 × 7 1/2 J, 17 × 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) 503 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Type C Tires and wheels (for vehicles sold in Mexico) Tire size 215/40R18 85Y, T145/70D17 106M Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 18 × 7 1/2 J, 17 × 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) Tire size 215/45R17 87W Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure) Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Wheel size 17 × 7 J Wheel nut torque 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) 504 6-1. Specifications Light bulbs A: Wedge base bulbs (clear) B: Double end bulbs C: Wedge base bulbs (amber) Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type Exterior Front side marker lights W3.8W 3.8 A License plate lights W5W 5 A Back-up lights W16W 16 A Interior Vanity lights (if equipped)  2 B Trunk light W5W 5 C Interior light  10 B Door courtesy lights (if equipped) T10 5 C 505 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Fuel information ■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your SUBARU has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. ■If your engine knocks ●Consult your SUBARU dealer. ●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. ■Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your SUBARU dealer. ■Fuel octane rating Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently. RON This octane rating is the Research Octane Number. AKI This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) fuel is not readily available in your area, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in maximum engine performance and you may hear some knocking (pinging) from the engine while using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel. Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect your warranty coverage. 506 6-1. Specifications ■Gasoline for California-certified LEV If your vehicle was certified to California’s low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label, it is designed to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. ■SUBARU recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ●SUBARU recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits. ●All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems. ■SUBARU recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol is available in many areas. SUBARU recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. 507 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications ■SUBARU does not recommend blended gasoline ●If you use gasohol in your SUBARU, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 93 AKI (98 RON). ●SUBARU DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. ■SUBARU does not recommend gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). SUBARU DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your SUBARU dealer for service. ●Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol). DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol. (15% ethanol) (50% ethanol) (85% ethanol) 508 6-1. Specifications CAUTION ■Notice on fuel quality ●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine and/or fuel system will be damaged. ●Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. ●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage. ■Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. ■When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint. 509 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Standard tire Compact spare tire Tire size (→P. 512) DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 511) Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows. Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 374) 510 6-1. Specifications Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire. TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 377) Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 502) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Summer tire or all season tire (→P. 377) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (→P. 464) A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. 511 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer’s identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year Manufacturer’s code *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Type A Type B 512 6-1. Specifications Tire size ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) ■ Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter 513 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Tire section names Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer Uniform Tire Quality Grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of SUBARU vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your SUBARU dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 514 6-1. Specifications ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 – 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. ■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 515 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Meaning Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer. Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight 516 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below Production options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two 517 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Tire related term Meaning Vehicle normal load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire 518 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass Intended outboard sidewall (a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire 519 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Tire related term Meaning Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall 520 6-1. Specifications *: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Tire related term Meaning Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E- 1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing 521 6-1. Specifications 6 Vehicle specifications Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 16 through 22 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 522 6-2. Customization Customizable features Item Function Default setting Customized setting Keyless access with push button start system (→P. 25) Keyless access with push button start system On Off Operation signal (Hazard warning flashers) On Off Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off Operation buzzer volume Level 5 Level 0 to 7 Number of permissible times of continuous smart lock Twice Unlimited Remote keyless entry system (→P. 38) Unlocking operation Driver’s door unlocked in one step, both side doors unlocked in two steps Both side doors unlocked in one step Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked On Off Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your SUBARU dealer. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your SUBARU dealer. 523 6-2. Customization 6 Vehicle specifications Remote keyless entry system (→P. 38) Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked 60 seconds 30 seconds 120 seconds Operation signal (Hazard warning flashers) On Off Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off Operation buzzer volume Level 5 Level 0 to 7 Door lock buzzer On Off Trunk lid unlocking function On Off Trunk lid unlocking operation Push and hold (short) Push and hold (long) One short push Two short pushes Panic function On Off Vehicle finder function On Off Alarm (→P. 87) (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) Operation when doors are unlocked using the mechanical key Off On Item Function Default setting Customized setting 524 6-2. Customization Turn signal lever (→P. 195) Lane change turn signal function On Off Automatic light control system (→P. 233) Light sensor sensitivity ±0% -40% to +40% Lights (→P. 233) Time that the welcome lighting system operates (when entering/ exiting the vehicle) 30 seconds Off 60 seconds 90 seconds Windshield wiper-linked automatic headlights On Off Rear window defogger (→P. 302) Time elapsed before the rear window defogger turn off (vehicles with automatic air conditioning system) 15 minutes Continue Illumination (→P. 306) Time elapsed before lights turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds 30 seconds Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off Operation after the engine switch is turned off On Off Interior light illumination upon approach (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) On Off Interior light illumination On Off Item Function Default setting Customized setting 525 6-2. Customization 6 Vehicle specifications Auto dimmer cancel function (→P. 199) Sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel function Level 3 Off Level 1 (low) to 5 (high) Item Function Default setting Customized setting 526 6-2. Customization For owners 7 527 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 528 Seatbelt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) . 529 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) . 532 528 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., West Building Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 529 7 For owners Seatbelt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité ● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu’elle passe bien sur l’épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l’épaule. ● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège. ● Ne pas vriller la ceinture de sécurité. The following is a French explanation of seatbelt instructions extracted from the seatbelt section in this manual. See the seatbelt section for more detailed seatbelt instructions in English. 530 Guide de la ceinture de sécurité avant Pour faciliter le déroulage de la ceinture de sécurité, passez-la dans le guide. Lorsque vous accédez aux sièges arrière ou en descendez, sortez la ceinture de sécurité de son guide. 531 7 For owners Entretien et soin ■ Ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées ou exagérément usées. DANGER ■État et usure des ceintures de sécurité ●Évitez d’abîmer les ceintures de sécurité en coinçant dans la porte une sangle, le pêne ou la boucle. ●Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. Remplacez immédiatement une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n’apporte aucune garantie de protection de l’occupant contre des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ●Vérifiez que le pêne est bien verrouille dans la boucle de ceinture et que les sangles ne sont pas vrillées. Si la ceinture de sécurité ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez immédiatement votre concessionnaire SUBARU. ●Remplacez le siège avec la ceinture au cas où votre véhicule aurait été impliqué dans un accident sérieux, même en l’absence de dommage visible. ●Ne pas essayer d’installer, démonter, modifier ou mettre au rebut les ceintures de sécurité. Faites effectuer les réparations nécessaires par votre concessionnaire SUBARU. Une mauvaise manipulation des prétensionneurs peut en altérer le fonctionnement correct, avec un risque de blessures graves, voire mortelles. 532 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English. 533 7 For owners Modèles équipés de coussins gonflables SRS et de dispositifs de retenue d’épaule pour le conducteur, le passager avant et les passagers arrière Votre véhicule est équipé d’un système de retenue supplémentaire, en plus de la sangle diagonale, à chacun des sièges avant et à chacun des sièges arrière. Le système de retenue supplémentaire (SRS) se compose de six coussins gonflables. Les configurations sont les suivantes. Les airbags frontaux du conducteur et du passager avant Les airbags latéraux du conducteur et du passager avant Les coussins gonflables rideaux (pour le conducteur, le passager avant et les passagers arrière) Ces airbags SRS sont conçus uniquement comme un complément à la protection principale fournie par la ceinture de sécurité. Ce système contrôle également les prétensionneurs des ceintures de sécurité avants. 534 DANGER ■Airbag SRS ●Pour obtenir la protection maximum dans le cas d’un accident, le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicules doivent toujours porter leurs ceintures de sécurité lorsque le véhicule est en mouvement. L’airbag SRS est conçu uniquement comme un complément à la protection principale fournie par la ceinture de sécurité. Il n’annule pas le besoin d’attacher les ceintures de sécurité. En combinaison avec les ceintures de sécurité, il apporte la meilleur protection cumulée en cas d’accident grave. Ne pas porter de ceinture de sécurité augmente les risques de blessures graves ou mortelles lors d’une collision, même lorsque le véhicule a les airbags SRS. ●Ne pas s’asseoir ou s’appuyer trop près de l’airbag SRS. Parce que l’airbag SRS se déploie à une vitesse considérable, encore plus rapidement qu’en un clin d’oeil, et à une force également considérable pour vous protégez dans des collisions à grande vitesse, la puissance d’un airbag peut blesser un occupant dont le corps serait trop près de l’airbag SRS. Il est également important de porter votre ceinture pour éviter les blessures qui peuvent résulter de l’airbag SRS entrant en contact avec un occupant dans une mauvaise position, comme projeté en avant lors du freinage avant l’accident par exemple. Même quand positionné correctement, il reste possible que l’occupant souffre de blessures minimes, telles que des abrasions et des bleus au visage ou aux bras à cause de la puissance de déploiement de l’airbag SRS. 535 7 For owners DANGER ■Airbag SRS ●Les airbags SRS se déploient avec une force et une vitesse considérables. Les occupants qui ne sont pas dans des positions correctes lors du déploiement des airbags pourraient souffrir de blessures graves. Puisque l’airbag SRS a besoin de suffisamment de place pour se déployer, le conducteur doit toujours se tenir droit et le plus en arrière possible dans son siège, le plus éloigné possible du volant tout en maintenant le contrôle complet du véhicule. De même, le passager avant doit déplacer son siège le plus en arrière possible et se tenir le plus droit et le plus en arrière possible dans le siège. ●Ne placez aucun objet sur ou au-dessus du cache de l’airbag SRS ou entre vous et l’airbag SRS. Si l’airbag SRS se déploie, ces objets pourraient interférer avec son bon fonctionnement et pourrait être propulsés à l’intérieur du véhicule et causer des blessures. ●Ne placez aucun objet (y compris des sangles ou des cordes) sur la garniture du volant, l’habillage de la colonne de direction ou le tableau de bord. • Ces objets risquent de se prendre dans le volant et d’empêcher le coussin gonflable avant SRS, etc., de fonctionner correctement. • Si le coussin gonflable avant SRS se déploie, ces objets risquent de se transformer en projectiles et de provoquer des blessures. 536 DANGER ■Airbag SRS ●Placez les enfants de 12 ans et moins dans le siège arrière, correctement attachés à tout moment. L’airbag SRS se déploie avec une vitesse et une force considérable, et peut blesser et même tuer les enfants, particulièrement s’ils ont 12 ans ou moins et qu’ils ne sont pas retenus ou mal retenus. Parce que les enfants sont plus légers et plus fragiles que les adultes, le risque qu’ils soient blessés par le déploiement est plus élevé. Pour cette raison, nous recommandons fortement que TOUS les enfants (ycompris ceux dans des sièges enfants, ou qui sont trop grands pour les sièges de sécurité enfants) s’assoient dans un siège ARRIÈRE et soient correctement attachés dans un siège de sécurité enfant ou avec une ceinture de sécurité, quel que soit le dispositif adapté pour l’âge, la taille et le poids de l’enfant. Fixez TOUJOURS fermement TOUS les sièges de sécurité enfants (ycompris les réhausseurs vers l’avant) dans le siège ARRIÈRE. Les statistiques prouvent que les enfants sont mieux protégés lorsqu’ils sont assis à l’arrière plutôt qu’à l’avant. 537 7 For owners DANGER ■Airbag SRS ●N’INSTALLEZ JAMAIS DE SIÈGE DE SÉCURITÉ ENFANT VERS L’ARRIÈRE DANS LE SIÈGE AVANT. LE FAIRE POURRAIT CAUSER DES BLESSURES GRAVES VOIRE MORTELLES À L’ENFANT EN PLAÇANT LA TÊTE DE L’ENFANT TROP PRÈS DE L’AIRBAG SRS. ●N’autorisez jamais un enfant à se tenir debout ou à s’agenouiller dans le siège passager avant, et ne tenez jamais un enfant sur vos genoux ou dans vos bras. L’airbag SRS se déploie avec une force considérable et peut blesser ou même tuer l’enfant. ●Quand l’airbag SRS se déploie, de la fumée se dégage. Cette fumée peut causer des problèmes respiratoires pour les individus avec des antécédents d’asthme ou d’autres problèmes respiratoires. Si vous ou vos passagers avez des problèmes respiratoires après le déploiement de l’airbag SRS, prenez l’air immédiatement. ●Un airbag SRS qui se déploie dégage du gaz chaud. Les occupants peuvent être brûlés s’ils sont en contact direct avec le gaz chaud. 538 Composition du système d’airbags SRS Capteur frontal secondaire (côté droit) Témoin d’alerte du système d’airbags SRS Module de l’airbag frontal (côté conducteur)(à deux étapes) Témoin MARCHE et ARRÊT de l’airbag frontal du siège passager avant (au centre du tableau de bord) Module de l’airbag frontal (côté passager avant)(à deux étapes) Module de détection de l’occupant passager avant Capteur d’impact de porte (côté droit) Module de coussin gonflable rideau (côté droit) Circuits électriques des airbags Module de l’airbag latéral (côté passager avant) Capteur de l’airbag latéral (côté droit du montant central) Capteur des airbags rideaux (côté droit de la roue arrière) Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité (côté du passager avant) 539 7 For owners Capteur satellite de sécurité (sous le siège arrière du milieu) Capteur du système de détection de passager du passager avant Bouton de boucle de ceinture de sécurité (côté passager avant) Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité (côté conducteur) Capteur des airbags rideaux (côté gauche de la roue arrière) Capteur de l’airbag latéral (côté gauche du montant central) Module de l’airbags latéral (côté conducteur) Capteur d’impact de porte (côté gauche) Module de contrôle d’airbag (y compris capteurs d’impact et capteurs de retournement) Capteur frontal secondaire (côté gauche) Module de coussin gonflable rideau (côté gauche) 540 Votre véhicule est équipé d’airbags avancés (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le système d’airbag contrôle la puissance de déploiement des airbags pour le conducteur et le passager avant. Le système d’airbag passager avant comprend le module de contrôle de détection des occupants du siège passager avant, etc. Les principaux éléments du système d’airbags SRS sont illustrés cidessus. Le système d’airbags SRS est commandé par le module de contrôle de l’airbag. Le module de contrôle d’airbag consiste en un capteur d’airbag. Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latéral l’exige, le système d’airbags SRS déclenche les dispositifs de gonflage. Le déploiement rapide des airbags est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs de gonflage, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le mouvement des occupants. 541 7 For owners Système avancé d’airbags frontaux SUBARU Votre véhicule est équipé d’un système avancé d’airbags frontaux SUBARU, conforme aux nouvelles conditions des airbags frontaux avancés dans la norme Federal Motor Vehicle Safety amendée (FMVSS) No. 208. Le système avancé d’airbags frontaux SUBARU détermine automatiquement la force de déploiement de l’airbag frontal SRS du conducteur au moment du déploiement, et également l’activation ou non de l’airbag frontal SRS du passager avant et, si activé, la force de déploiement de l’airbag SRS frontal et le moment de déploiement. Votre véhicule a des autocollants de sécurité sur les pare-soleils du conducteur et du passager avant commençant par les mots “EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS” et une étiquette attachée au couvercle de la boîte à gants commençant par les mots “Even with Advanced Air Bags”. Assurez-vous de lire avec attention les instructions sur les autocollants de sécurité et les étiquettes. Attachez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité. Le système avancé d’airbags frontaux SUBARU est un système de retenue en complément qui doit être utilisé en combinaison avec une ceinture de sécurité. Tous les occupants doivent mettre leur ceinture de sécurité ou être placés dans des sièges de sécurité enfant adaptés. L’airbag frontal SRS du conducteur est stocké dans la partie centrale du volant. L’airbag frontal SRS du passager avant est stocké près du haut du tableau de bord sous une marque “SRS AIRBAG”. Dans une collision moyenne à sévère, les composants suivant se déploient. ● Airbag SRS frontal pour le conducteur ● Airbag SRS frontal pour le passager avant Ces composants complètent les ceintures de sécurité en réduisant l’impact à la tête et à la poitrine de l’occupant. 542 DANGER ■En cas de déploiement (gonflage) des airbags SRS Ne touchez pas les composants du système d’airbag SRS près du volant et du tableau de bord à mains nues immédiatement après le déploiement. Le faire peut causer des brûlures car les composants peuvent être très chauds à la suite du déploiement. ■Précautions avec les sièges de sécurité enfant N’INSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIÈGE ENFANT VERS L’ARRIÈRE DANS LE SIÈGE PASSAGER AVANT MÊME SI L’AIRBAG FRONTAL SRS DU PASSAGER AVANT EST DÉSACTIVÉ. Veillez à l’installer correctement sur la banquette ARRIÈRE. De même, il est fortement recommandé que tout siège enfant tourné vers l’avant ou siège rehausseur soit installé sur la banquette ARRIÈRE , et que même les enfants trop grands pour utiliser un siège de sécurité enfant s’assoient sur la banquette ARRIÈRE . Un enfant assis sur le siège passager avant pourrait être tué ou gravement blessé si l’airbag frontal SRS de passager avant se déployait. La banquette ARRIÈRE est l’endroit où les enfants sont le plus en sécurité. 543 7 For owners Airbag latéral SRS et airbag rideau SRS Les airbags latéraux sont stockés côté portière de chaque dossier de siège, et porte une étiquette “SRS AIRBAG”. Dans une collision moyenne à sévère, l’airbag latéral SRS sur le côté de l’impact du véhicule se déploie entre l’occupant et la partie basse de la portière, et complémente la ceinture de sécurité en réduisant l’impact sur la poitrine et la taille de l’occupant. L’airbag latéral SRS opère uniquement pour les occupants des sièges avants. Le coussin gonflable rideau SRS situé de chaque côté de l’habitacle est logé du côté du toit (entre le montant avant et un point au-dessus du siège arrière). Une inscription “SRS AIRBAG” est située en haut de chaque montant avant et arrière. Lors d’une collision latérale modérée à sévère, le coussin gonflable rideau SRS, situé du côté où le véhicule est percuté, se déploie entre l’occupant et la vitre latérale et intervient en complément de la ceinture de sécurité, en réduisant l’impact sur la tête de l’occupant. Si le véhicule se trouve dans une position extrêmement inclinée, par exemple lorsqu’il est impliqué dans un accident par retournement, les coussins gonflables rideaux SRS se déploient en même temps que les prétensionneurs de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur et du passager avant pour aider à réduire l’impact sur la tête des occupants. Votre véhicule est équipé d’un système de coussins gonflables rideaux SRS SUBARU conforme à la norme fédérale de sécurité No. 226 applicable aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS). 544 DANGER ■En cas de déploiement (gonflage) des airbags SRS Ne touchez pas les composants du système d’airbag latéral SRS autour du dossier du siège avant à mains nues immédiatement après le déploiement. Le faire peut causer des brûlures car les composants peuvent être très chauds à la suite du déploiement. Après le déploiement, ne touchez aucune partie du système d’airbag rideau SRS (depuis le montant frontal à la partie du rail latéral de toit au dessus du siège arrière). Le faire peut causer des brûlures car les composants peuvent être très chauds à la suite du déploiement. ■Précautions pour l’airbag latéral SRS et airbag rideau SRS L’airbag latéral SRS et l’airbag rideau SRS sont conçus comme un complément à la protection principale fournie par la ceinture de sécurité. Ils n’annulent pas le besoin d’attacher les ceintures de sécurité. Il est aussi important de mettre votre ceinture pour aider à empêcher les blessures qui peuvent résulter quand un occupant n’est pas assis dans une position droite. ■Précautions avec les airbags SRS Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les airbags SRS. À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre. ●Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité correctement. Les airbags SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité. ●Le conducteur doit toujours se tenir droit et bien en arrière dans le siège, le plus éloigné possible du volant, tout en conservant le contrôle complet du véhicule, et le passager avant doit déplacer son siège vers l’arrière aussi loin que possible, se tenir droit et bien en arrière dans le siège. 545 7 For owners DANGER ■Précautions avec les airbags SRS ●L’airbag SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le passager avant se trouve très près de l’airbag. Éloignez le siège passager avant au maximum de l’airbag et réglez le dossier de siège de façon à être assis bien droit dans le siège. ●Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d’un airbag. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. SUBARU recommande vivement d’installer tous les nourrissons et jeunes enfants aux places arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant. 546 DANGER ■Précautions avec les airbags SRS ●Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre le tableau de bord. ●Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant l’airbag SRS passager avant ou bien s’asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant. ●Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux. ●Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière. 547 7 For owners DANGER ■Précautions avec les airbags SRS ●Interdisez à quiconque de s’agenouiller sur le siège passager en appui contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule. ●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur le tableau de bord ou la garniture centrale du moyeu de volant. Au déploiement des airbags SRS conducteur et passager avant, tout objet risque de se transformer en projectile. ●Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre de pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, à la lunette arrière, aux montants avant et arrière ni au rail latéral de toit. 548 DANGER ■Précautions avec les airbags SRS ●N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement des airbags SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d’en gêner le déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les airbags latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des airbags latéraux, entraînant la mort ou des blessures graves. ●Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants des airbags SRS (􀁯P. 538). En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des airbags SRS. ●Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déploiement (gonflage) des airbags SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds. ●Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement de l’airbag SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations de la peau. ●Si les parties renfermant les airbags SRS, telles que la garniture du volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire SUBARU. 549 7 For owners DANGER ■Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système d’airbags SRS Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire SUBARU si vous avez besoin d’intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l’une des modifications suivantes. Les airbags SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ●Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des airbags SRS. ●Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit, porte, partie basse de la porte ou de la garniture de porte. ●Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-choc avant ou des flancs de l’habitacle. ●Installation d’un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasse-neiges, de treuils. ●Modification du système de suspension du véhicule. ●Installation d’appareils électroniques, tels qu’un radioémetteur/récepteur ou d’un lecteur CD. ●Aménagements du véhicule pour une personne atteinte d’un handicap physique. 550 Moniteurs du système d’airbags SRS Un système de diagnostic contrôle continuellement la fonctionnalité du système d’airbag SRS (y-compris les prétensionneurs des ceintures de sécurité avants) lors de la conduite du véhicule. Le témoin lumineux du système d’airbags SRS montrera l’opération normale en s’allumant pendant environ 6 secondes quand le contacteur de démarrage est mis en position “ON”. Les composants suivants sont contrôlés par l’indicateur: ● Capteur frontal secondaire (côté droit) ● Capteur frontal secondaire (côté gauche) ● Module de contrôle d’airbag (y compris capteurs d’impact et capteurs de retournement) ● Module de l’airbag frontal (côté conducteur) ● Module de l’airbag frontal (côté passager avant) ● Capteur de l’airbag latéral (côté droit du montant central) ● Capteur de l’airbag latéral (côté gauche du montant central) Véhicules avec écran multifonctionnel monochrome Véhicules avec écran multifonctionnel couleurs 551 7 For owners ● Capteur d’impact de porte (côté droit) ● Capteur d’impact de porte (côté gauche) ● Module de l’airbags latéral (côté conducteur) ● Module de l’airbag latéral (côté passager avant) ● Capteur des airbags rideaux (côté droit de la roue arrière) ● Capteur des airbags rideaux (côté gauche de la roue arrière) ● Module des airbags rideaux (côté droit) ● Module des airbags rideaux (côté gauche) ● Capteur satellite de sécurité (sous le siège arrière du milieu) ● Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité (côté conducteur) ● Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité (côté passager avant) ● Bouton de boucle de ceinture de sécurité (côté passager avant) ● Capteur du système de détection de l’occupant passager avant ● Module de commande de détection de l’occupant passager avant ● Témoin indicateur MARCHE et ARRÊT de l’airbag frontal du passager avant ● Tous les câblages connexes 552 DANGER ■Témoin d’alerte SRS Si le témoin d’avertissement montre l’un des états suivants, il peut y avoir un dysfonctionnement des prétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité, du système de coussins gonflables SRS et/ou du système de détection de l’occupant du siège passager avant. Amenez immédiatement votre véhicule chez votre concessionnaire SUBARU le plus proche afin de faire vérifier le système. Sans vérification et réparation adaptées, les prétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité, le système de coussins gonflables SRS et/ou le système de détection de l’occupant du siège passager avant ne fonctionneront pas correctement en cas de collision, ce qui pourrait augmenter les risques de blessures. ●Clignotement du témoin lumineux ●Le témoin lumineux ne s’allume pas quand le contacteur de démarrage est d’abord mis en position “ON”. ●Éclairage continu du témoin lumineux ●Éclairage du témoin lumineux pendant la conduite Index 553 Abbreviation list . 554 Alphabetical index 555 What to do if. 565 554 Abbreviation list Abbreviation/Acronym list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING ABS Anti-lock Brake System ACC Accessory ALR Automatic Locking Retractor CFRP Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic CRS Child Restraint System DISP Display ECU Electronic Control Unit EDR Event Data Recorder ELR Emergency Locking Retractor GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating I/M Emission inspection and maintenance LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LED Light Emitting Diode LSD Limited Slip Differential M + S Mud and Snow MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl OBD On Board Diagnostics SRS Supplemental Restraint System TIN Tire Identification Number TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System TRAC Traction Control VIN Vehicle Identification Number VSC Vehicle Stability Control 555 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index A/C 286, 293 ABS. 257 Access key If the access key does not operate properly. 476 Air conditioning filter 389 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter . 389 Automatic air conditioning system 293 Manual air conditioning system 286 Airbags Airbag operating conditions. 108, 116 Airbag precautions for your child 125 Airbag warning light 430 Curtain airbag operating conditions. 116 Curtain airbag precautions 125 Front passenger occupant detection system 131 General airbag precautions 125 Locations of airbags . 93 Modification and disposal of airbags . 128 Proper driving posture. 91, 125 Side airbag operating conditions. 116 Side airbag precautions 125 Side and curtain airbags operating conditions. 116 Side and curtain airbags precautions 125 SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners 532 SRS airbags . 93 Alarm.87 Anti-lock brake system257 Audio input.304 Audio system Audio input 304 AUX port304 iPod.304 Portable music player304 USB memory.304 USB port304 Auto dimmer cancel function 201 Automatic air conditioning system293 Automatic headlight leveling system237 Automatic light control system.233 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission.185 If the select lever cannot be shifted from P474 Manual mode 188 Mode select switch187 Paddle shift levers.188 AUX port .304 Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs .405 Wattage.504 Battery Checking .368 If the vehicle has a discharged battery 480 Preparing and checking before winter .277 Bottle holders.310 Brake Fluid 366 Parking brake197 Brake assist257 Break-in tips .159 A B 556 Alphabetical index Brightness control Instrument panel light control .201 Care Alcantara®.346 Alloy wheels 337 Exterior336 Interior.342 Seatbelts .343 Cargo capacity .272 Chains.279 Child restraint system Booster seats, definition .141 Booster seats, installation.145 Convertible seats, definition .141 Convertible seats, installation.145 Front passenger occupant detection system.131 Infant seats, definition .141 Infant seats, installation.145 Installing CRS with LATCH anchors 146 Installing CRS with seatbelts .148 Installing CRS with top tether straps151 Child safety Airbag precautions125 Battery precautions.371, 483 Child restraint system .141 How your child should wear the seatbelt 62 Installing child restraints145 Power window lock switch 74 Power window precautions .77 Removed key battery precautions .395 Seat heater precautions319 Seatbelt guide.61 Seatbelt precautions .64 Trunk precautions .49 Cleaning Alcantara®.346 Alloy wheels 337 Exterior336 Interior.342 Seatbelts.343 Clock.315 Condenser 366 Console tray.311 Coolant Capacity 498 Checking.364 Cooling system Engine overheating.485 Cruise control 243 Cup holders311 Curtain airbags 93 Customizable features 522 Daytime running light system235 Defogger Rear window.302 Side mirror 302 Dimensions 492 Dinghy towing283 C D 557 Alphabetical index Display Drive information 221 Multi-information display 210, 218 Trip information 211 Warning messages. 440 Do-it-yourself maintenance 355 Door courtesy lights Door courtesy lights 306 Wattage 504 Doors Door lock 25, 38, 43 Door windows. 74 Side mirrors 71 Drive information 221 Driver’s seatbelt reminder light 432 Driving Break-in tips . 159 Correct posture. 91 Procedures. 156 Winter drive tips 277 Electric power steering. 257 Emergency, in case of If the access key does not operate properly. 476 If the engine will not start 471 If the select lever cannot be shifted from P 474 If the vehicle has a discharged battery . 480 If the warning buzzer sounds . 428 If the warning light turns on 428 If the warning message is displayed 440 If you have a flat tire 457 If you lose your keys. 475 If you think something is wrong . 426 If your vehicle becomes stuck .488 If your vehicle needs to be towed .419 If your vehicle overheats .485 Engine Compartment 360 Engine hood358 Engine switch172, 182 How to start the engine.172, 182 Identification number.493 If the engine will not start 471 Ignition switch172, 182 Overheating.485 Engine coolant Capacity 498 Checking .364 Engine coolant temperature gauge 199, 223 Engine hood .358 Engine immobilizer system.82 Engine oil Capacity 496 Checking .361 Preparing and checking before winter .277 Engine switch.172, 182 Engine switch light 306 Event data recorder .18 Floor mat.320 Fluid Brake.366 Washer372 Fog lights Switch239 Front fog lights Switch239 Front passenger occupant detection system.131 E F 558 Alphabetical index Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light.432 Front seats Adjustment 53 Front side marker light Replacing light bulbs.405 Wattage.504 Front turn signal lights Switch195 Fuel Capacity 495 Fuel gauge 199 Fuel pump shut off system427 Gas station information .568 Information 505 Refueling.78 Fuel door.78 Fuel filler lid78 Fuel pump shut off system .427 Fuses.397 Gauges199 Glove box309 Hazard lights Switch418 Hazard warning flashers Switch418 Head restraints Adjusting 58 Headlights Automatic headlight leveling237 Switch233 Welcome lighting function .236 Heaters Seat heaters318 Side mirror.302 Hill start assist .264 Horn.198 I/M test 354 Identification Engine.493 Vehicle 493 Ignition switch172, 182 Ignition switch light Ignition switch light306 Illuminated entry system.306 Immobilizer system .82 Indicator lights.203 Inside rear view mirror 69 Interior light Interior light .307 Switch .307 Wattage.504 Jack Vehicle-equipped jack .457 Jack handle 457 Jam protection function Power windows.75 Keyless access with push button start system Antenna location .27 “Keyless access” entry function.25 Starting the engine172 Keyless entry .38 Keys Access key22 Engine switch172, 182 If you lose your keys .475 If your access key battery is discharged 476 Key number.22 Keyless entry 38 Keys22 Mechanical key .23 Transmitter38 G H I J K 559 Alphabetical index Language (multi-information display) 228 License plate lights Replacing light bulbs 405 Wattage 504 Light bulbs Replacing . 405 Wattage 504 Lights Door courtesy lights 306 Engine switch light 306 Fog light switch. 239 Hazard light switch . 418 Hazard warning flasher switch. 418 Headlights switch . 233 Interior light switch 307 Replacing light bulbs 405 Trunk light. 48 Turn signal lever. 195 Vanity lights 314 Wattage 504 Welcome lighting function 236 Load capacity 276 Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance 355 General maintenance. 351 Maintenance data. 492 Maintenance requirements. 348 Manual air conditioning system . 286 Manual transmission 192 Meter Auto dimmer cancel function .201 Indicators.203 Instrument panel light control .201 Meters .199 Multi-information display.210, 218 Settings .210, 228 Warning lights .428 Warning messages .440 Microphone.305 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror.69 Side mirror heater .302 Side mirrors.71 Vanity mirrors 314 Multi-information display Drive information.221 G-force display 224 Language 228 Multi-information display.210, 218 Settings .228 Trip information .211 Warning messages .440 Noise from under vehicle16 Odometer 210, 230 Oil Engine oil 361 Opener Engine hood358 Fuel filler lid .78 Trunk lid 46 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding.71 Outside temperature display 210, 230 Overheating, Engine485 L M N O 560 Alphabetical index Paddle shift levers .188 Parking brake .197 Parking lights Switch233 Power outlets .316 Power windows74 Radiator 366 Rear seats.56 Rear side marker lights Switch233 Rear turn signal lights Switch195 Rear view camera.248 Rear view mirror Inside rear view mirror.69 Outside rear view mirrors71 Rear window defogger 302 Replacing Fuses 397 Key battery392 Light bulbs.405 Tires 457 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 529 REV indicator .161 Seat heaters .318 Seatbelts Adjusting the seatbelt60 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 62 Child restraint system installation.145 Cleaning and maintaining the seatbelts .343 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 62 How to wear your seatbelt 60 How your child should wear the seatbelt 62 Pregnant women, proper seatbelt use.64 Reminder light.432 Seatbelt guide.61 Seatbelt pretensioners61 Seating capacity 276 Seats Adjustment53 Adjustment precautions 54 Child seats/child restraint system installation 145 Cleaning342 Head restraint .58 Properly sitting in the seat.91 Seat heaters318 Service reminder indicators 203 P R S 561 Alphabetical index Shift lever Automatic transmission 185 If the select lever cannot be shifted from P 474 Manual transmission 192 Shift lock system. 474 Side airbags. 93 Side maker lights Replacing light bulbs 405 Switch. 233 Wattage 504 Side mirror Adjusting and folding 71 Spare tire Inflation pressure 502 Storage location . 457 Spark plug 498 Specifications 492 Speedometer . 199 Steering Column lock release. 67 Steering wheel Adjustment . 67 Meter control switches 219 Storage feature 308 Stuck If your vehicle becomes stuck. 488 Sun visors 313 Switch “DISP” switch 213 Driving pattern selector switch187 Engine switch172, 182 Fog light switch .239 Hazard light switch418 Hazard warning flasher switch418 Ignition switch172, 182 “km/h MPH” switch199 Light switches233 Meter control switches 219 “ODO/TRIP” switch .212, 219 Power door lock switch44 Power window switch74 “TRACK” switch.259 Transmission shift switches 188, 190 Vehicle stability control (VSC)/TRAC off switch258, 259 Window lock switch.74 Wiper and washer switch240 562 Alphabetical index Tachometer Tachometer.199 Tail lights Switch233 Theft deterrent system Alarm.87 Engine immobilizer system .82 Theft prevention labels86 Tire inflation pressure .502 Tire information Glossary515 Size .512 Tire identification number511 Uniform tire quality grading513 Tires Chains.279 Checking .374 Compact spare tire457 If you have a flat tire457 Inflation pressure.382 Inflation pressure sensor.374 Information 509 Replacing 457 Rotating tires.374 Size .502 Snow tires .277 Spare tire.457 Tire pressure monitoring system 432 Tools .457 Towing Dinghy towing .283 Emergency towing 419 TRAC.257 “TRACK” mode259 Traction control .257 Transmission shift switches .188, 190 Transmitter Locking/Unlocking.38 Replacing the battery392 Transmitter38 Trip meter .210, 230 Trunk lid Opener46 Trunk light Wattage.504 Turn signal lights Switch .195 USB port .304 Vanity lights Vanity lights.314 Wattage.504 Vanity mirrors 314 Vehicle identification number .493 Vehicle stability control (VSC).257 T U V 563 Alphabetical index Warning buzzers Electric power steering. 430 Keyless access with push button start system 442, 446 Seatbelt reminder . 432 Warning lights Anti-lock brake system 430 Automatic headlight leveling system 430 Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light. 432 Brake assist system . 430 Brake system 428 Charging system 429 Cruise control indicator light 430 Electric power steering system warning light 430 Electronic engine control system 430 Engine oil pressure. 429 High engine coolant temperature 429 Keyless access with push button start system 442, 446 Low fuel level 432 Low tire pressure.432 Malfunction indicator lamp430 Master warning light 432 Open door .432 Pretensioners 430 Seatbelt reminder light .432 Slip indicator light 430 SRS airbags 430 Tire pressure monitoring system 432 Warning messages 440 Washer Checking .372 Preparing and checking before winter .277 Switch240 Washing and waxing .336 Weight Cargo capacity 272 Load limits .276 Weight .492 Welcome lighting function 236 Wheels 386 Window glasses 74 Window lock switch.74 W 564 Alphabetical index Windows Power windows .74 Rear window defogger 302 Washer240 Windshield wipers .240 Winter driving tips .277 565 What to do if. What to do if. A tire punctures P. 457 If you have a flat tire The engine does not start P. 471 If the engine will not start P. 82 Engine immobilizer system P. 480 If the battery is discharged The select lever cannot be moved out P. 474 If the select lever cannot be shifted from P The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone (vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display) The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or illuminates (vehicles with a color multi-information display) Steam can be seen coming from under the engine hood P. 485 If your vehicle overheats The key is lost P. 475 If you lose your keys The battery runs out P. 480 If the battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked P. 43 Doors The trunk cannot be opened P. 46 Trunk lid The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand P. 488 If the vehicle becomes stuck 566 What to do if. A warning light or indicator light comes on P. 428 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds. ■ Instrument cluster Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display Vehicles with a color multi-information display ■ Center panel 567 What to do if. ■ Warning lights P. 430 or P. 428 P. 430 P. 429 P. 430 P. 429 P. 432 P. 429 P. 432 P. 432 or P. 430 P. 432 P. 430 P. 432 P. 432 or P. 430 P. 432 P. 430 P. 442, 446 *1: The light flashes or illuminates in red to indicate a malfunction. *2: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction. Brake system warning light Slip indicator Automatic headlight leveling system warning light Charging system warning light Cruise control indicator light*2 Low engine oil pressure warning light Open door warning light High engine coolant temperature warning light*1 Low fuel level warning light Malfunction indicator lamp Driver’s seatbelt reminder light Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light SRS airbag system warning light Tire pressure warning light ABS warning light Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light Master warning light Electric power steering warning light Keyless access with push button start system indicator light 568 GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever P. 358 Trunk lid opener P. 46 Engine hood lock release lever P. 358 Fuel filler lid P. 78 Tire inflation pressure P. 502 Fuel filler lid opener P. 78 Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 13.2 gal. (50 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.) Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 79, 495 Cold tire inflation pressure Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Compact spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) P. 502 Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill  reference) • Without filter • With filter qt. (L, Imp. qt.) 5.5 (5.2, 4.6) 5.7 (5.4, 4.8) P. 496 Engine oil type SUBARU approved engine oil Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING” Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 0W-20 P. 496

SEOCONTENT-END